Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide

Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Return
to Menu
Modular ICS 6.0
System
Coordinator
Guide
Norstar, Meridian and Companion are trademarks of
Nortel Networks
© Nortel Networks 2002
1-800-4 NORTEL
www.nortel.com/norstar
P0992640 02
Printed in Canada
Table of Contents
Getting started with Norstar 13
Using this guide 13
Understanding programming 14
Before you start 15
What you need to be to do programming 15
Using Buttons 16
Using the buttons under the display 19
The programming overlay 19
A map for working in programming 22
Starting and ending a session 26
Ending a session 26
Frequently used programming operations 29
Changing the time and date on the display 29
Adding or changing a system speed dial 31
Changing the name of a telephone 34
Changing the name of a line 35
Making changes to Call Forward No Answer 36
Making changes to Call Forward on Busy 38
Making Changes to Do Not Disturb on Busy 39
What would you like to do next? 40
Answering calls 43
Answering incoming calls with Hunt Groups 43
Answering an incoming call 43
Line buttons 44
What line indicators mean 44
Rings you may hear 44
Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns 45
Answering calls at a prime telephone 46
Using a central answering position (CAP) module 47
Customizing your CAP module 47
Monitoring telephones with the CAP module 48
Release button 48
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
4 / Table of Contents
Hearing aid compatibility 49
Viewing information about a call on the display 49
Using Call Information for a particular call 49
Displaying Call Information before or after answering 50
Displaying Call Information for a call on hold 51
Making Call Display information appear automatically 51
Changing which information is shown first about a call 51
Picking up a call ringing at another telephone 52
Answering ringing telephones using Directed Pickup 52
Answering any ringing telephone using Group Pickup 53
Changing a telephone pickup group 54
Trunk Answer 55
Answering a call using Trunk Answer 55
Answer buttons 55
Creating a Conference Call 57
Disconnecting one party 57
Independently holding two calls 58
Putting a conference on hold 58
Splitting a conference 59
Removing yourself from a conference 59
Listening to a call as a group 60
Canceling Group Listening 60
Using Handsfree/Mute 61
Answering calls without lifting the receiver 61
Making calls without lifting the receiver 61
Muting the set 62
Changing a regular call to handsfree 62
Changing a handsfree to a regular call 62
Using Handsfree 62
Changing Handsfree for a telephone 63
Handsfree Answerback 64
Turning Privacy on or off for a call 65
Creating a conference by releasing privacy 66
Making a call private 66
Checking call length using Call Duration Timer 66
Disconnecting by accident 67
Time 67
Making calls 68
Choosing a line using a line button 70
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Table of Contents / 5
Line pools 71
Using a line pool to make a call 71
Programming a memory button with a line pool feature code
72
Making calls from an ISDN terminal 72
Changing how you dial your calls 72
Using Standard dial 73
Using Automatic dial 73
Using Pre-dial 73
When the internal number you have called is busy 74
Priority Call 74
Making a priority call 74
Giving a telephone the ability to make priority calls 75
Using Ring Again 76
Time savers for making calls 79
Storing a number on a memory button for Autodial 79
Adding an autodial button 79
Choosing a line for Autodial 80
Using intercom as the line for Autodial 80
Using Last Number Redial 82
Preventing a telephone from using Last Number Redial 82
Using Speed Dial 83
Making a speed dial call 84
Changing and adding System Speed Dials 84
Adding or changing User Speed Dial 84
Using Saved Number Redial 86
Dialing a saved number 86
Blocking Saved Number Redial 86
Handling many calls at once 88
Using Hold 88
Retrieving a held call 88
Holding automatically 88
Listening on hold 89
Holding a call exclusively 89
Using Call Queuing 90
Transferring calls 91
Using the transfer feature 91
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
6 / Table of Contents
Transferring a call 91
Transferring external calls 92
Canceling a transfer 93
Using Camp-on 94
Parking a call 96
Retrieving a parked call 96
Using Call Park 96
Using system-wide call appearance (SWCA) 98
Auto Hold 99
Incoming calls 100
Outgoing calls 101
No free call keys 102
Using Callback 102
Forwarding your calls 103
Forwarding your calls to another Norstar telephone 103
Canceling Call Forward 103
Using Call Forward at your telephone 103
Overriding Call Forward 104
Changing the automatic Call Forward settings for a telephone
104
Changing Forward no answer 104
Changing the delay before a call is forwarded 105
Forward on busy 105
DND on Busy 106
Call Forward and Voice Mail 107
Line Redirection 107
Turning on Line Redirection 108
Canceling Line Redirection 109
Allowing a telephone to redirect calls 109
Turning the redirect ring for a telephone on or off 110
How Line Redirection is different from Call Forward 112
Using Line Redirection 112
Centralized voice mail and auto attendant 113
Using a centralized voice mail system 113
Communicating in the office 114
Paging 114
Making a page announcement 114
Activating and deactivating the ability to page 115
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Table of Contents / 7
Creating page zones 115
Using Page with external paging equipment 117
Sending messages 117
Sending a message 117
Canceling a message you have sent 119
Viewing your messages 119
Replying to a message 119
Replying to a message using an analog telephone connected to
an ASM 120
Removing items from your message list 121
Removing items from your message list using an analog
telephone connected to an ASM 121
Viewing messages you have sent 122
Using Voice Call 123
Muting Voice Call tones 124
Answering a Voice Call with Handsfree 124
Blocking Voice Calls using Voice Call Deny 124
Tracking your incoming calls 126
Using Call Log 126
Call Log options 127
Logging a call manually 127
Enabling and disabling autobumping 128
Viewing your Call Log 128
Viewing a Call Log item 128
Erasing log items 129
Making a call using Call Log 129
Creating a password to your Call Log 130
Changing your Call Log password 130
Deleting an assigned password 131
Programming a telephone to log calls automatically 131
Using external Voice mail 133
Customizing your telephone 134
Finding out what a button does using Button Inquiry 134
Changing the set display contrast 135
Changing the language on the display 135
Programming a feature code onto a memory button 136
Programming feature buttons 136
Erasing a feature button 136
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
8 / Table of Contents
Labeling your set 138
Applying button labelling 138
Business Series Terminals 138
Norstar button caps 139
Default button assignments 139
T7316 Business Series Terminal button defaults 140
M7310 telephone button defaults 142
M7324 telephone button defaults 144
M7208 and T7208 button defaults 145
M7100 and T7100 button defaults 146
Rules of default button assignment 146
Moving line buttons 147
Changing the type of ring 148
Adjusting the Ring volume 149
Hiding the message or calls indication 149
Restoring the messages and calls indication 149
User Preferences 151
Using User Preferences 151
Changing button programming 152
Changing User Speed Dial 153
Changing Call Log options 154
Changing how calls are dialed 154
Changing the language used on the display 155
Making the display lighter or darker 155
Changing the ring type 155
Programming Hunt Groups 157
Adding or removing members from a group 159
Moving members of a group 160
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 161
Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group 162
Setting the distribution mode 163
Setting the hunt delay 164
Programming busy line setting 165
Programming the queue time-out 166
Programming the overflow set 167
Setting the name 168
Using Silent Monitor 169
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Table of Contents / 9
Feature notes 171
Using the Hospitality features 173
Hospitality passwords 173
Room/desk information 175
Programming room information 175
Using the room/set programming 178
Programming the alarm feature 180
Using the Administration set to control alarms 181
Using the alarm 182
Canceling an alarm 183
Turning off an alarm 183
Telephone features 185
Installing Business Series Terminals 185
Installing Norstar telephones 187
Naming a telephone or a line 189
Moving telephones 189
Stopping calls from ringing at your telephone:
Do Not Disturb (DND) 190
Stopping calls 190
Refusing to answer a call 190
Canceling Do Not Disturb 190
Using Do Not Disturb 190
Using Background Music 191
Turning Background Music off 191
ISDN PRI and BRI 192
ISDN PRI 192
ISDN PRI features 193
Network Name Display for PRI 193
Name and number blocking for PRI 194
Emergency 911 Dialing 194
Two-way DID 194
Call by Call service selection for PRI 195
Dialing Plan and PRI 196
ISDN BRI 196
Line access from an ISDN terminal 197
ISDN BRI features 198
Network Name Display for BRI 198
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
10 / Table of Contents
Name and number blocking for BRI 199
Service provider features 199
Call Forward 199
Canceling Call Forward 200
Calling the number your calls are forwarded to 200
Automatic Call Back 200
Automatic Recall 200
MCID 201
Network Call Diversion 201
ISDN BRI terminals 202
ISDN applications for BRI and PRI 202
Videoconferencing and video telephony 202
Desktop conferencing 202
File transfer 202
Telecommuting 203
Group 4 fax 203
Remote LAN access 203
Leased line backup 203
LAN to LAN bridging 203
Internet and database access 203
Using System features 204
Using alternate or scheduled services 204
Preventing certain calls from being made 204
Making additional telephones ring 204
Changing the lines used by outgoing calls 205
Turning Services on and off 205
An example of how to turn on a Service manually 206
Turning Services on and off using feature codes 207
Viewing the active Services on a two-line display 208
Viewing the active Services on a one-line display 209
Using passwords 211
Using a Basic password 211
Registration password 212
Changing passwords 212
Clearing a Call Log password 213
Hospitality password 214
Silent Monitor password 215
Using special telephones 215
Direct-dial 215
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Table of Contents / 11
Changing the direct-dial telephone assignments 216
Hotline 217
Bypassing a Hotline 217
Making a telephone a hotline telephone 217
Control telephone 218
SM Supervisor 219
Using Set lock 219
Changing Set Lock programming for a telephone 220
Using an auxiliary ringer 220
Turning the auxiliary ringer for a telephone on or off 220
Using Host System dialing signals 221
Link 221
Preventing a telephone from using Link 222
Pause 223
Long Tones 223
Programmed Release 224
Run/Stop 224
Wait for Dial Tone 225
Using pulse dialing for a call 225
Using your Norstar system from an external location 226
Controlling access to your Norstar system 227
Direct inward system access (DISA) 227
Class of Service (COS) 227
Maintaining security 228
Accessing Norstar remotely over the public network 228
Tones 229
Using Class of Service (COS) passwords 230
Changing your Class of Service 230
General System features 232
Set profile 232
Line profile 232
Pulse or tone dialing 233
Disconnect supervision 233
Hunt Groups 233
Internal numbers 234
Line assignment 234
Target line 235
Line pools 235
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
12 / Table of Contents
Overflow call routing 236
M7100 and T7100 sets 236
Memory buttons 237
One-line display 237
Prime line 238
Private lines 238
Volume bar 238
Troubleshooting 239
Using the alarm telephone 239
Reporting and recording alarm codes 239
Testing the telephone 239
Testing the telephone display 240
Testing the telephone buttons 241
Testing the speaker in the telephone handset 241
Testing the telephone headset 241
Testing the telephone speaker 242
Testing the power supply to a telephone 242
Common feature displays 243
Glossary 247
Index 265
Backup programming overlays 289
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
/ 13
Getting started with Norstar
Your Norstar digital key system has many powerful features that
can be customized to keep up with changes in your workplace.
Using this guide
The person who is responsible for adding or moving telephones
or making changes to the system is called the system coordinator.
This guide is designed to give the system coordinator all the
information he or she needs to carry out these kinds of jobs.
The first section contains step-by-step instructions on changing
the time and date, deciding how many rings it takes before a call
is forwarded and other day-to-day programming. Once you
understand these basic steps, you can move on to the many other
features described in the second section of the guide, and refer to
the first section only from time to time.
You can look at the contents page for an overview of the features
that are available, or check the index for specific features or
messages displayed on your telephone.
Emergency 911 Dialing
Emergency 911 Dialing is the capability to access a public
emergency response system by dialing the digits 9 1 1.
Emergency 911 Dialing
State and local requirements for support of Emergency
911 Dialing service by Customer Premises Equipment
vary. Consult your local telecommunications service
provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and
regulations.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
14 / Getting started with Norstar
Understanding programming
When your system is installed, your installer or customer service
representative programs it to work with your telephone lines,
with your private network, if you have one, and with optional
equipment. They customize the system for your office. All
programming is recorded in the Modular ICS 6.0 Programming
Record.
You may want to further customize your system. For example,
you can change how some features work, or adapt the system to
changes in your office. Programming allows you to change
settings that probably need to be updated regularly because of
staff turnover or new business contacts. You can also assign
features and program buttons on individual telephones.
There are four ways to customize and maintain your Norstar
system:
•
Initial programming is done for you by your installer or
customer service representative. It deals mostly with how
the system interacts with lines, telephones, and other
equipment.
•
Your programming as a system coordinator changes how
features work for the system, as needed. It requires a
system coordinator password.
•
A basic programming password is available to allow
individuals other than the system coordinator to make
changes without giving access to sensitive programming
capabilities.
•
Personal programming is available to anyone through the
Feature button on their Norstar telephone. It allows
individuals to change how their telephone works to suit
themselves.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Getting started with Norstar / 15
Before you start
Before you begin programming, plan what changes you want to
make. Record the changes in the Norstar Programming Record so
that you have the information at hand. For example, if you are
going to program system speed dial numbers, fill out the page in
the Norstar Programming Record so that you have all the numbers
and codes handy once you start programming.
What you need to be to do programming
Programming is done using a telephone that can show two lines
of information on its display. Examples of telephones with twoline displays are shown on page 16.
You need a programming overlay to show which buttons to press
when you are doing programming. See The programming
overlay on page 19.
When you use a telephone for programming, it is taken out of
service. This means it is unable to receive or make calls, and the
call forward features do not work. Do not use the main reception
telephone for programming because you may lose incoming
calls.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
16 / Getting started with Norstar
Using Buttons
The two-line telephone you use for everyday calling can be used
for changes and maintenance. Examples of telephones with twoline displays are shown in the illustration.
Sets used for programming and maintenance
T7316
M7324
M7310
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Getting started with Norstar / 17
The next illustration numbers the buttons that are used for both
day-to-day communication and programming on the T7316 set.
The following table describes what each numbered area is used
for.
Business Series Terminal programming buttons
1
7
2
5
6
4
3
8
4
9
10
1 Display
Shows instructions for everyday calling as well as
for programming.
2 Display buttons
Have a variety of uses. The current use is shown
on the display above each button.
3 Dialpad
Used for dialing numbers when you are making
calls.
For programming, the dialpad is also used for
entering numbers and letters
4 Memory buttons
Dial a number or feature code stored on the
button.
5 Feature button
Allows you to enter a feature code while using or
programming the telephone.
6 Hold button
Puts an active call on hold.
7 Release button
Hangs up an active call or ends programming.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
18 / Getting started with Norstar
8 Volume rocker switch
Turns the volume you hear through the handset
up or down.
During programming this switch is used to adjust
settings, such as for the display contrast.
9 Mute
Mutes the transmitter in the handset.
10 Handsfree
Allows you to speak to and hear a call without
using the handset or headphones.
This guide uses the icons for Business Series Terminal buttons
in feature code examples. Your set may have different labels,
or the buttons may be in slightly different locations. Refer to
the table below for comparable Norstar icons
Telephone buttons
Business Series
Terminals
Norstar sets
T7100, T7208,
T7316, T7406
Button description
M7100, M7208, M7310,
M7324
≤
Feature
ƒ
Bottom right-hand
button
Handsfree/Mute
©
≥ú
≥
√
®
Hold
˙
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
≥
Volume Control
√
Release
®
P0992640 02
Getting started with Norstar / 19
Using the buttons under the display
The three display buttons are used both for telephone features
and programming. What each button does depends on what the
display shows. Some display instructions that you may see when
making changes on the system include OK, CHANGE, or COPY. In
this guide, display button instructions are underlined.
Display buttons
display text
display button command
display button
The programming overlay
When you begin programming, a group of buttons on the
telephone become the buttons for moving through programming
headings and settings. The programming overlay is a paper
cutout that is included with the Programming record. It relabels
the four buttons to name the actions you use during
programming. If you lose the overlay, there is an extra overlay
included in the back of this book that can be printed and cut out.
Programming buttons are active or inactive at different stages of
programming. A button is active (meaning you can use that
option), when the indicator next to it is lit (ª or º).
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
20 / Getting started with Norstar
Business Series Terminal programming overlay
Business
Series
Terminals
Programming
Overlay
Displays the
heading for the
current level
Show
Heading
Moves back one
item on the
current level
Back
Next
Displays the first
setting within a
menu level
Moves display one
item forward on the
current menu level
Placing the programming overlay on a Business Series Terminal
He
adin
g
Bac
k
Prog
Busi
ness
Se
Term ries
ina
ls
ra
Ove mmin
rlay g
Sho
w
Ne
xt
He
adin
g
Bac
k
Prog
Busi
ness
Se
Term ries
ina
ls
ra
Ove mmin
rlay g
Sho
w
Ne
xt
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Getting started with Norstar / 21
Placing the programming overlay on Norstar sets
Norstar Programming Overlay
Heading
Show
Back
Next
Norstar Programming Overlay
Heading
Show
Back
Next
Shows you the
heading for the
current level
Moves you one
item back at the
current level
P0992640 02
Norstar Programming Overlay
Heading
Show
Back
Next
Shows you the
first setting
within
the level
Moves you one
item forward at
the current level
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
22 / Getting started with Norstar
A map for working in programming
The tables on the following three pages show the headings that
display when you move through the display menu after pressing
≤••Ç؈ÏÈÌ and entering the password (the
default password is ÅΘȈ or ¤‹fl›fl).
The default Basic password (ıÅÍÈÇ or
¤¤‡›¤) can be used with a limited number of feature
codes, including ••ÊȘ‰ and the codes for turning
call services on and off. For more information, see Using
passwords on page 211.
Terminals&Sets
Customize each telephone on the system. You
can change where a call is forwarded, give a
telephone a name, or allow certain features to be
used at a telephone. You can change the button
programming on any telephone on the system.
Lines
Program names for each line.
Services
Turn services on or off: Ringing service,
Restriction service, and Routing Service.
Sys speed dial
Program up to 200 different telephone numbers
so internal users can dial them with a three-digit
code (001-255).
Passwords
Change or erase the password you use for
programming, or the one you use for Call log. On
an XC system, you can change the Companion
portable telephone registration password.
Time&Date
Change the time, date, or both.
System prgrming
Access the headings that define Hunt Groups,
Hospitality services. Enter the BusName, which
displays on caller ID lines.
On a MICS-XC system, access registration
records for Companion portable telephones so
you can disable or enable the sets.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Getting started with Norstar / 23
System Coordinator user interface
Terminals
& Sets
Show set
Enter digits
or press
LIST.
Capabilities
Fwd no answer
Fwd to
Fwd delay
Fwd on busy
DND on busy
Handsfree
HF answer back
Pickup grp
Page zone
Paging
D-Dial
Priority call
Hotline
Fwd to
Aux. ringer
Allow redirect
Redirect ring
ATA settings
Name
User
preferences
Model
Button progrming
User speed dial
Call log opt’ns
Dialing opt’ns
Language
Display cntrst
Ring type
Voice path
P0992640 02
Restrictions
Set restrictions
Telco features
1st Display
Called ID
Intrn #
Extrnl# .... Use prime
line
ATA ans timer
Msg Indicate
# of buttons
B01 ... BXX
CLR TEL#
FEATR
# of speed dialers
Spd # 255-279
No one answered
Unanswered by me
Log all calls
No autologging
Standard dial
Pre-dial
Automatic dial
Dflt: Handsfree
Headset
Set lock (Partial, Full,
None)
Allow last no
Allow saved no
Allow link
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
24 / Getting started with Norstar
Note: Some headings will only show if required by the
selected options for the previous heading.
Lines
Services
Show lines
___
Enter digits or
press LIST
Ringing
service
Restrn
services
Routing
service
Sys speed
dial
(001-255)
Speed dial #
Enter digits or
press LIST
Passwords
Call Log
pswds
Progrming
pswds
Reg. pswd
(MICS-IX, only)
Hospitality
Time&Date
Name
Sched: Night
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
Sched: Night
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
Sched: Night
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
add/change tel #
Use prime line
Display digits
Name
Show set
Off, Manual,
Auto
Off, Manual,
Auto
Off, Manual,
Auto
Log pswd
Sys admin: 23646
Basic: 22742
Desk pswd: 4677
Cond pswd:None
SM pswd:
745368
Hour
Minutes
Year
Month
Day
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Getting started with Norstar / 25
System
Prgrming
Hunt Group
Show Group
Member DNs
Line assignment
Mode
Companion
(MICS-XC
only)
Registration
Radio data
Hunt Delay
If Busy
Q Timeout
Overflow
Name
Aux. Ringer
Distnct ring
Registration
Portable DNs
Re-evaluation
Radios
Cells
BusName
Hospitality
Room/desk info
Show set
Service time
Hour
Minutes
Attn attempts
Retry intrvl
Attn duration
Time format
Expired alarms
Alarm
P0992640 02
Show line ___
Unassigned/
Assigned
Broadcast
Sequential
Rotary
BusyTone/Queue
Show DN
Available/
unavailable
Status
Cell Assignment/
Show radio
Assigned/
unassigned
Show Cell
Cell radios/Cell
nghbrs/
Cell rad nghbrs
Room #
Adm pwd req’d
12 hr/24 hr
Notify set
Use tone
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
26 / Getting started with Norstar
Starting and ending a session
As system coordinator the first steps in making any change to the
Norstar system are always the same.
Jan 1
12:00pm
Press ≤.
Press ••Ç؈ÏÈÌ. This is the same
as pressing ••¤flfl‹››.
Feature:
Password:
RETRY
Terminals&Sets
Press ÅΘȈ. This is the same as
pressing ¤‹fl›fl. Press RETRY to re-enter
the password if you enter an incorrect character.
The display shows the first of the seven headings
available for administration programming.
ÅΘȈ is the password, unless the password has been changed.
Check the Programming Record for the most recent password.
Ending a session
Display digits:Y
CHANGE
Press ® to end the session.
End of session
After a few seconds, the time and date reappears
on the display.
The system makes any changes you indicated in programming as
soon as you move away from a setting, either by using the
navigation buttons or by pressing ®.
You can see if the changes you made to telephone programming
have taken effect by pressing the UPDATE display key. The
display shows you how many telephones have not been updated.
Press DNs to see the specific extensions where programming
changes have not taken effect yet. Items disappear from the list
as they are updated.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Getting started with Norstar / 27
Record any changes you make in the Modular ICS 6.0 Programming
Record. If there is a problem with the system, the installer needs
to see a history of the changes you have made.
Remember to inform people in your office of any changes you
have made that affect them. For example, you may change
system speed dial codes or change the number of rings before an
unanswered telephone is forwarded.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
28 / Getting started with Norstar
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Frequently used programming operations / 29
Frequently used programming
operations
The following sections highlight the most frequently used
programming operations. To consult these or other programming
operations, see either the Table of Contents or the Index.
Changing the time and date on the display
Jan 1
12:00pm
Feature:
Password:
Press ≤.
Press ••°›fl‹ (which is the same
as••ÊȘ‰).
Press ¤¤‡›¤ (ıÅÍÈÇ ) or
RETRY ¤‹fl›fl (ÅΘȈ)
The passwords can be changed. See Using passwords on page 211 for more
information.
Entering letters and numbers using the dialpad
first press
fourth press
second press
third press
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
30 / Frequently used programming operations
In this example, you are changing the time to 1:30 p.m.
Hour:01
NEXT
Press CHANGE.
CHANGE
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the hour. Use two
digits for all hours. The clock on the display shows
either one or two digits.
Hour:___
CANCL
AM
OK
CHANGE
Hour:01
NEXT
CHANGE
Minutes:00
NEXT
CHANGE
The display prompts you to choose a.m. or p.m.
Press CHANGE and OK to select p.m.
Press NEXT.
Press CHANGE.
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the minutes.
Minutes:___
CANCL
If you are only changing the time and not the date, press ® to end your session.
In this example, you are changing the date to July 15, 1998.
Press NEXT.
Minutes:30
NEXT
CHANGE
Year:01
NEXT
CHANGE
Press CHANGE.
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the year.
Year:___
CANCL
Press NEXT.
Year:02
NEXT
CHANGE
Month:01
NEXT
CHANGE
Press CHANGE.
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the month.
Month:___
CANCL
Use numbers for the months: 01 is January; 12 is December.
Press NEXT.
Month:07
NEXT
CHANGE
Day:01
NEXT
CHANGE
Press CHANGE.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Frequently used programming operations / 31
Day:___
CANCL
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the day.
Day:15
CANCL
Press ® to end your session.
End of session
The clock controls the schedules used for services such as ringing
and routing services.
After a power failure, the clock is behind by the length of time
power was lost. For example, if the power is out for two minutes,
the clock is two minutes behind.
Adding or changing a system speed dial
You program a speed dial on your Norstar so that anyone in your
office can dial a frequently used number using a three-digit code
(001-255).
To change a speed dial that already exists, follow the same steps.
The new programming overwrites the previous number and
settings.
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press ≤.
12:00pm
Press ••¤flfl‹››.
Feature:
Press ¤‹fl›fl.
Password:
RETRY
Choose a speed dial code
Terminals&Setsˆ
P0992640 02
Press ‘ three times.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
32 / Frequently used programming operations
Press ≠.
Sys Speed Dialˆ
Press ‚‚⁄.
Speed dial #:___
LIST
You can pick any system speed dial code between 001 and 255.
Press ≠.
Speed dial #:001ˆ
FIND
Add or change the telephone number
Press CHANGE.
001:No number
CHANGE
Use the dialpad to program the telephone number
that you want to add. The telephone number can be
up to 24 digits long.
001:___
CANCL
OK
001:nnnnnnnn__
CANCL
BKSP
OK represented by the row of n-characters shown here.
Your display shows the telephone number, which is
Press OK.
Select a line for the speed dial code
001:nnnnnnnn
CLR
CHANGE
Press ‘.
Use prime line
CHANGE
Press CHANGE to see your options: Use prime line,
a specific line (for example Use line: 01), a line
pool (for example Pool code:71), or Use routing
tbl.
Stop pressing CHANGE when the display shows the prime line again.
Use prime line
CHANGE
In this example, the system selects the prime line
automatically to dial speed dial code 001. This is
the most common choice.
If you assign a specific line to a system speed dial number, only telephones with
an appearance of that line can use the speed dial number.
Choose what shows up on the display
Use prime line
CHANGE
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Press ‘.
P0992640 02
Frequently used programming operations / 33
Display digits:Y
CHANGE
Your choices are Yes and No. Yes means the
display shows the telephone number. Press
CHANGE.
Display digits:N
CHANGE
No means the display shows a name for the code.
Program a name for a speed dial
The system has a standard name to display, so it is not necessary for you to
program one. However, if you have chosen not to display the telephone number,
you may want a specific name.
Alpha tagging feature: This feature offers name display for calls coming in over
lines that offer number-only display services.
If you specify a name for a speed dial, and that person calls in on an external line,
the speed dial name you specify acts as the name display for the call if the call
number matches the number in the speed dial list. If the telephone has also been
configured to display Caller ID (Caller ID set) and the name of a caller first (1st
display), then the name you program for the speed dial code is the name that will
display.
For example: If you create a speed dial for the courier company you use, and
assign the name Courier with the following process, when that company calls you,
Courier would appear on the display for the call.
Press ‘.
Display digits:N
CHANGE
Press ≠.
Name:Sys Spd Di...
CHANGE
This is the name the display shows if you do not
...al 001 ...
CHANGE change it. Press CHANGE.
Decide the name you want to give to the speed dial
Name:___
--> code.
Press the dialpad button that has the first letter of the name until the display
shows the letter you want.
Press -->.
Name:S
BKSP
Name:S__
<-BKSP
-->
Use the dialpad and --> until you have the entire
--> name.
The name can be up to 16 characters long, including spaces.
Press # on the numeric dialpad to add spaces.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
34 / Frequently used programming operations
Press ‘.
Name:SAVINGS BANK
<-BKSP
-->
Press ® to end your session.
Name:SAVINGS BA...
CLR
CHANGE
Or you can press –, then ‘ to program another speed dial
number.
End of session
Changing the name of a telephone
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press ≤.
12:00pm
Press ••¤flfl‹››.
Feature:
Press ¤‹fl›fl.
Password:
RETRY
Change the name of a telephone
Press ≠.
Terminals&Setsˆ
Show set:___
LIST
Enter the internal number (DN) of the telephone or
voice mail extension. In this example, the DN is
221.
If the set has already been given a name, it appears after DN: on the display.
Press ≠ then ‘.
221:221ˆ
FIND
Name:221
CHANGE
This is the name the display shows if you do not
change it. Press CHANGE.
Decide what name you want to give to the telephone number.
Name:___
-->
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Press the numeric dialpad button that has the first
letter of the name until the display shows the letter
you want.
P0992640 02
Frequently used programming operations / 35
Press -->.
Name:J
BKSP
-->
Name:J___
<-BKSP
-->
Use the dialpad and --> until you have the entire
name.
Name:JEAN B
<-BKSP
-->
Press ‘ to use the name you have
entered.
The name can be up to seven characters long, including spaces.
Name:JEAN B
CLR
Press ® to end your session.
CHANGE
You can press – once to continue programming this telephone, or
press – twice to return to the Terminals&Sets heading.
End of session
Changing the name of a line
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press ≤.
12:00pm
Press ••¤flfl‹››.
Feature:
Press ¤‹fl›fl.
Password:
RETRY
Change the name of a line
Terminals&Setsˆ
Press ‘.
Linesˆ
Press ≠.
Show line:______
LIST
Enter the three-digit number of the line you want
to name. In this example, the line is 002.
This is the name the display shows if you don’t change it.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
36 / Frequently used programming operations
Line002:Line002ˆ
FIND
Press ≠.
Name:Line002
Press CHANGE.
CHANGE
Decide what name you want to give to the line.
Name:___
-->
Press the dialpad button that has the first letter of
the name, until the display shows the letter you
want.
Press -->.
Name:L
BKSP
-->
Name:L___
<-BKSP
-->
Use the dialpad and --> until you have the entire
name.
The name can be up to seven characters long, including spaces.
Name:LOCAL
<-BKSP
Name:LOCAL
CLR
-->
Press ‘ to use the name you have
entered.
Press ® to end your session.
CHANGE
You can press – once to continue programming this line, or press
– twice to return to the Lines heading.
End of session
Making changes to Call Forward No Answer
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press ≤.
12:00pm
Press ••¤flfl‹››.
Feature:
Press ¤‹fl›fl.
Password:
RETRY
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Frequently used programming operations / 37
Change where a call goes when there is no answer
Press ≠.
Terminals&Setsˆ
Show set:___
LIST
Enter the internal number (DN) of the telephone or
voice mail extension. In this example the DN is 225.
If the set has been given a name, it appears on the display.
Press ≠.
225:225
FIND
Capabilitiesˆ
Press ≠.
Fwd no answerˆ
Press ≠.
Fwd to:None
Press CHANGE and enter the internal number where
you want the calls to be sent. In this example the
internal number is 221.
CHANGE
You can press CLR to change the destination back to None.
Change the number of times the telephone rings before it is forwarded
Fwd to:221
CLR
Press ‘.
CHANGE
Forward delay:4
CHANGE
Use the CHANGE button to choose the number of
times the telephone rings before it is forwarded.
Your choices are 2, 3, 4, 6 and 10 rings.
Forward delay:3
CHANGE
Press ® to end your session.
You can press – to continue programming capabilities for this
telephone, or press – four times to return to the Terminals and Sets
heading.
End of session
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
38 / Frequently used programming operations
Tip - If the Norstar set is a member of a Hunt Group, the
Call Forward no answer feature is overridden and the
Hunt Group call continues to ring until the hunt time has
expired. For more information on Hunt Groups see
Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
Making changes to Call Forward on Busy
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press ≤.
12:00pm
Press ••¤flfl‹››.
Feature:
Press ¤‹fl›fl.
Password:
RETRY
Change where a call goes when a telephone is busy
Press ≠.
Terminals&Setsˆ
Show set:___
LIST
Enter the internal number, which gets assigned as
the intercom number, of the telephone extension.
In this example, the intercom number is 225.
If the set has been given a name, it appears on the display.
Press ≠.
225:225
FIND
Capabilitiesˆ
Press ≠.
Fwd no answerˆ
Press ‘.
Fwd on busy. . .
Press ≠.
Fwd to:None
Press CHANGE and enter the internal number where
you want the calls to be sent. In this example, the
internal number is 221.
CHANGE
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Frequently used programming operations / 39
You can press CLR to change the destination back to None.
Fwd to:221
CLR
Press ® to end your session.
CHANGE
You can press ‘ to continue programming capabilities for this
telephone, or press – three times to return to the Terminals and Sets
heading.
End of session
Tip - If the Norstar set is a member of a Hunt Group, the
Call Forward on busy feature is overridden and the Hunt
Group call continues to ring until the hunt time has
expired. For more information on Hunt Groups see
Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
Making Changes to Do Not Disturb on Busy
When you are on a call and a second call comes in, your
telephone rings softly to alert you to the second call. You can turn
this feature on or off for each telephone.
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press ≤.
12:00pm
Press ••¤flfl‹››.
Feature:
Press ¤‹fl›fl.
Password:
RETRY
Change Do Not Disturb on Busy
Terminals&Setsˆ
P0992640 02
Press ≠.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
40 / Frequently used programming operations
Show set:___
LIST
Enter the internal number of the telephone
extension. This becomes the number for the
intercom button. In this example, number is 225.
If the set has been given a name, it appears on the display.
Press ≠.
225:225
FIND
Capabilitiesˆ
Press ≠.
Fwd no answerˆ
Press ‘ twice.
DND on Busy:N
Press CHANGE to turn the feature on.
CHANGE
DND on Busy:Y
CHANGE
A second press turns it off again. Press ® to end
your session.
Press ‘ to continue programming capabilities for this telephone, or
press – three times to return to the Terminals and Sets heading.
End of session
For more information on Call Forward and similar settings, see
Forwarding your calls to another Norstar telephone on page
103.
What would you like to do next?
Some of the most common programming tasks are listed below.
For a comprehensive list of settings and instructions, see either
the Table of Contents or the Index.
Redirect calls coming in on a line.
See Turning on Line Redirection
on page 108.
Allow individuals to answer calls that are
ringing at another telephone.
See Picking up a call ringing at
another telephone on page 52.
Assign telephones to different zones for
paging.
See Paging on page 114.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Frequently used programming operations / 41
Turn the night service on and off.
See Making additional telephones
ring on page 204.
Use a basic password so others can take
care of programming such as changing
user speed dials, changing names, and
changing the time and date.
See Using passwords on page
211.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
42 / Frequently used programming operations
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls
Answering incoming calls with Hunt Groups
Your Norstar system now allows you to establish Hunt Groups
in your system. Hunt Groups are a group of Norstar set DNs
that can be called by a single directory number. The Hunt
Groups feature ensures calls are easily routed to the
appropriate people. You can program
•
•
•
•
•
the members for a Hunt Group
member position within a Hunt Group
how calls are distributed
how long a call spends looking for available members
what happens if all members are busy
For more information on Hunt Groups see Programming Hunt
Groups on page 157.
Answering an incoming call
There are three indications of an incoming call: ringing, a line
button flashing, and a message on the display. You do not
necessarily receive all three indications for any particular call.
For example, you may have a line that has been set up not to
ring at your telephone. If so, you see only a flashing line
button. There are many possible combinations, depending on
how your system is set up. See Choosing a line using a line
button on page 70 for more information on the use of lines.
If you receive a priority call and your telephone has no free
internal line buttons, you cannot transfer the priority call, you
must accept or release it.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
44 / Answering calls
Line buttons
One line button for each line is assigned to your telephone.
Press the line button to select the line you want to answer or
use to make a call. Having several line buttons gives you
immediate access to more than one line.
The M7100 or T7100 sets have two intercom paths which are
used instead of line buttons to answer and make calls. Each set
can be assigned two lines. You can press ≥ to switch
between two calls, one active and one on hold.
What line indicators mean
º
Flashing on and off for
equal lengths of time
There is an incoming call on the line
º
Flashing on and off more
quickly
You have placed a call on hold
º
Flashing on for longer
than off
Someone else has put a call on hold
on that line
º
On, not flashing
You are connected to the call on that
line or the line is in use elsewhere
Off
The line is free
Rings you may hear
A double beep every 10
seconds
A call has been camped to your telephone.
A long single ring
There is an external call on the line for you.
A shorter double ring
There is an internal call on the line for you or
a call is being transferred to you.
A brief single ring
A call is being redirected on one of your
redirected lines. You cannot answer this call.
Three beeps descending
in tone
You are receiving a priority call.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 45
Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns
When lines, telephones and Hunt groups are configured on
your system, they can be assigned one of four distinctive ring
patterns (DRP). The default for all telephones is 1 and the
default for lines and Hunt groups is None, which is the lowest
priority. The highest priority is 4.
Call ringing: When multiple calls are presented to the
telephone, the call with the highest priority DRP setting will be
the call that rings at the telephone.
Call answering: When multiple calls are presented to a
telephone, and the user picks up the handset, the call with the
highest priority DRP setting is the call that is presented.
Note: External calls always have a higher priority than
internal calls.
Note: If the ring type is changed on a telephone after the DRPs
are set on the line, the line DRPs are overwritten by the
telephone settings. If the DRPs are set for a line after
telephone programming, then the telephone ring
programming is overridden by the line DRP program.
Refer to the Modular ICS 6.0 Installation Guide for
information about setting distinctive ring for lines. If
the call is to a Hunt group, and the Hunt group DRP is
higher than the line DRP, the Hunt group DRP will take
precedence within the Hunt group. Refer to Assigning a
distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group on page 162.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
46 / Answering calls
Answering calls at a prime telephone
Each line in a Norstar system can be assigned a prime
telephone. Calls not answered at their normal destinations are
transferred to the prime telephone. The prime telephone is
usually the attendant’s telephone. The installer or customer
service representative programs a prime telephone for a line.
Displays
DND from 221
The person at telephone 221 has forwarded
a call to you using Do Not Disturb.
DND transfer
The system has transferred a call to you from
a telephone with Do Not Disturb turned on.
DRT Line001
Nobody answered this call so the system
transferred it to you.
Someone has camped, parked or transferred
Line001 callback
CALLBACK a call on line 001, but no one has answered
it. Press CALLBACK or the line button to
connect to the call.
Line001 to prime
There is no telephone that can receive a call
on line 001 so the system has transferred it
to you.
Line002>Line052
The call coming in on line 002 was intended
for target line 052. Line 052 is busy so the
call has come to you.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 47
Using a central answering position (CAP) module
A central answering position (CAP) is a Norstar M7324
telephone and a CAP module that your installer or customer
service representative programmed as a CAP. You can have
five CAPs in a Norstar Modular system. It is best if the CAP is
the prime telephone and direct-dial telephone for the lines and
telephones it serves.
Norstar M7324 set with added CAP module
M7324 telephone
CAP module
A CAP module is an add-on device that provides 48 extra
memory or line buttons. You can connect one or two Norstar
CAP modules to the telephone to increase the number of lines
it can handle.
When a CAP module is first plugged into your telephone,
some of the module buttons are already programmed to dial an
internal number.
Customizing your CAP module
If your installer has programmed the CAP module to be the
central answering position for your system, you can move
external lines onto the CAP module by using ≤•°⁄.
See Moving line buttons on page 147.
Any of the buttons on your CAP module that do not select lines
can be programmed to dial internal or external numbers
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
48 / Answering calls
automatically. You can program features onto CAP module
buttons. See Time savers for making calls on page 79 and
Customizing your telephone on page 134 for information on
programming memory buttons.
Buttons on a CAP module cannot be assigned as answer
buttons.
Monitoring telephones with the CAP module
The indicators ˆ beside internal autodial buttons on your CAP
module show the status of Norstar telephones.
The indicator is on when the telephone has:
•
•
an active call
Do Not Disturb turned on
The indicator is off when a telephone has:
•
•
no active call
a call on hold and no other active call
Tip - You can send up to 30 messages from a CAP.
Release button
Pressing ® ends a call. You do not have to put the receiver
down. ® also ends feature programming.
While you are on a call, do not press ® to end a feature you
are using. If you do, you disconnect the call. Use ≤ instead.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 49
Hearing aid compatibility
The receivers on all Norstar telephones and Business Series
telephones are compatible with hearing aids as defined in the
FCC rules, Part 68, section 68.316. Not all hearing aids are
optimized for use with a telephone.
Viewing information about a call on the display
If you subscribe to Call Display services from your local
telephone company, one line of information about an external
caller is displayed after you answer. Depending on the setting
and the external information available, either the caller’s name
or telephone number is displayed.
When you transfer an external call to another Norstar user, this
information is displayed on the target telephone.
Call Display information becomes available between the first
and second ring of an incoming call. If you answer before the
Call Display information is available on your display, and you
press ≤°⁄⁄, you see only the line number or line
name.
To use logging features with Call Display, see Using Call Log
on page 126.
Using Call Information for a particular call
≤°⁄⁄
Call Information allows you to see information about
incoming calls. This information is more detailed than the Call
Display information you can receive automatically. For
external calls, you can display the name of the called-party set,
telephone number, and the line name. For an internal call, you
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
50 / Answering calls
can display the name of the called-party set and the internal
number of that set. You can see information for ringing,
answered, or held calls.
Call Information is available for calls even if they have been
transferred, forwarded or rerouted in some way.
Names and numbers for external calls are displayed only if you
have subscribed to Call Display services from your telephone
company.
Tip - Call Log displays the same information as Call
Information, along with the date and time of the call, and the
number of times the caller called.
Displaying Call Information before or after answering
To find out who is calling or to display information about your
current call:
1. Press ≤°⁄⁄.
2. Press £ or VIEW to display more information about an
external call.
Call Display information becomes available between the first
and second ring of an incoming call. If you answer before the
Call Display information is available on your display, and you
press ≤°⁄⁄, you see only the line number or line
name.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 51
Displaying Call Information for a call on hold
1. Press ≤°⁄⁄. The display reads ˆSelect a call.
2. Select the line on hold. Information about the call is
displayed.
3. Press £ or VIEW to display more information about an
external call.
Tip - If your telephone automatically displays Call Display
information for a call, you still need to press ≤°⁄⁄
before you can press £ or VIEW to display more information
about the call.
Making Call Display information appear automatically
Each telephone that rings for an external line can display Call
Display information for that line. After the call is answered,
Call Display information is always shown at the telephone that
answered the call. Your installer or customer service
representative can program telephones to have automatic Call
Display.
This feature is not available to ISDN terminals.
Changing which information is shown first about a call
Depending on the services you subscribe to, Call Display
information may contain up to three parts:
•
•
•
the name of the caller
the number of the caller
the name of the line in your system that the call is on.
For each telephone, you can determine which information is
displayed first.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
52 / Answering calls
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
5. Press ‘ four times.
6. Press ≠.
7. Choose a setting at 1stDisplay: using the CHANGE button.
The choices are Name, Numbr or Line.
You may see Unknown name or Unknown number on the
display if the information is not available from your telephone
company. You may see Private name or Private number
on the display if the caller blocks that information.
Picking up a call ringing at another telephone
You can pick up a call ringing at another telephone by using
Directed Pickup or Group Pickup.
Answering ringing telephones using Directed Pickup
You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your Norstar
system, except private lines.
1. Press ≤‡fl.
2. Enter the internal number of the ringing telephone.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 53
To use Call Pickup (Directed Pickup), the telephone must be
ringing. If, for example, the auxiliary ringer is ringing, but the
call is not ringing at a telephone, the call cannot be answered
using Directed Pickup. It must be answered normally at a
telephone that has a flashing indicator for the call, or by using
Trunk Answer. You can answer a call that is ringing because
someone has transferred the call to a telephone and the call is
ringing on an intercom button.
Tip - Directed pickup can retrieve calls that are ringing on an
Answer DN. While you may enter the internal number of the
telephone you hear ringing, it may be calls from another
telephone you are answering.
Answering any ringing telephone using Group Pickup
Your Norstar system can be divided into nine pickup groups.
If you are a member of a pickup group, you can pick up a call
that is ringing at any telephone in your pickup group.
1. Press ≤‡fi.
Group Pickup cannot be used to retrieve a camped call.
If there is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a
pickup group, a call ringing on an external line is answered
first followed by calls on the prime line and, finally, calls on
internal lines.
Tip - A Hunt Group call ringing at a Norstar set DN that is
also a member of a call pickup group can be picked up by any
Norstar set in that call pickup group. For more information on
Hunt Groups see Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
54 / Answering calls
Changing a telephone pickup group
Telephones can be put into and taken out of pickup groups.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ five times.
6. Press CHANGE at Pickup grp: to assign the telephone to
pickup group 1, 2, 3, or 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or to None.
Displays
Already joined
You are already connected to the telephone
that made the call you are trying to pick up.
This can happen if you are on a call to a
co-worker, your co-worker dials the number
of a telephone in your pickup group, and you
attempt to pick up that call.
Pickup denied
There is no call that you can pick up or the
call that was ringing has already been
answered.
You have tried to pick up a call on someone
else’s private line.
Pickup:
Enter the internal number of the telephone
that is ringing. (You may use an internal
autodial button to do this.)
If you decide not to answer a ringing call after
you have activated Directed Pickup, press
≤.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 55
Trunk Answer
The Trunk Answer feature allows you to answer a ringing call
anywhere in the system from any telephone in the system. The
line you are answering does not have to appear or ring at the
telephone you are using.
Trunk Answer works only with calls that are ringing on lines
for which a Ringing Service schedule is active and if Trunk
Answer is enabled by your installer or customer service
representative.
Answering a call using Trunk Answer
Press ≤°‚‚.
Tip - If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a
Ringing Service, the Trunk Answer feature picks up the external
call that has been ringing the longest.
Displays
Line denied
You have tried to pick up a call on someone
else’s private line.
Pickup denied
The call that is ringing is on a line that is not
in a Ringing Service.
Answer buttons
You can use an Answer button to monitor calls on another
person’s telephone. All calls to the monitored Norstar
telephone appear on the Answer button.
Answer buttons are useful for attendants who monitor
incoming calls for one or several other people. For example, a
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
56 / Answering calls
secretary may have appearances for three different bosses on
her answer buttons. Once a call for boss A is answered by the
secretary, the appearance stops at that set. This allows for
another (simultaneous) call to come in on the same line. The
same is true for boss B and boss C. When incoming call traffic
becomes high, the calls can then be routed to a Hunt Group to
optimize call handling. For more information on Hunt Groups
see Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
The Answer button heading under Featr settings allows
you to determine what types of calls alert at the telephone.
Your choices are:
•
•
•
Basic
Enhanced
Extended.
See the Modular ICS 6.0 Installer Guide for more information
on programming Answer buttons.
ISDN terminals cannot be assigned Answer buttons to monitor
other sets, but they can be monitored.
You cannot make calls using Answer buttons.
If more than one call is ringing at a telephone, the first call
appears on the attendant Answer button. Any subsequent calls
appear on intercom buttons, if they are available.
Tip - More than one attendant may have an Answer button for
a single telephone. This allows two or more attendants to handle
calls for a busy person.
Each telephone can handle calls for up to eight other people
using a separate Answer button for each person.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 57
Creating a Conference Call
You can talk to two people at once.
1. Make sure you have two calls, one active and one on hold.
2. Press ≤‹.
3. Press the appropriate button to retrieve the held call.
This is automatic on the M7100 and T7100 telephones.
You can create a conference when you are on a call.
1. Make a second call.
2. Press ≤‹.
3. Press the button where the first call is on hold to create a
conference.
Only the person who established the conference can process
the conference by using the procedures described in this
section.
Tip - You can create a conference by releasing privacy on a
call. See Turning Privacy on or off for a call on page 65.
Disconnecting one party
You can disconnect one party from a conference and continue
talking to the other.
You can activate this feature on all Norstar and Business
Series terminals except for M7100 or T7100 models.
1. Press the line button of the call that you want to disconnect.
The call that you want to keep is automatically put on hold.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
58 / Answering calls
2. Press ®. The call is disconnected.
3. Press the line button of the held call to speak to the
remaining person.
On a T7100 or on an M7100 set:
1. Press ≤£‹, to place one caller on hold. Press ≥
again, to put the caller you want to keep on hold.
2. Press ®. The call is disconnected.
3. Press ≥ to speak to the remaining party.
Independently holding two calls
For all telephones except the M7100 and T7100 sets, you can
put the two people in a conference call on hold independently
so that they cannot talk to each other.
1. Press the line button of one person. The other person is
automatically put on hold.
2. Press ≥. The second person is put on hold.
You can re-establish the conference.
1. Take one call off hold.
2. Press ≤‹.
3. Take the other call off hold.
Putting a conference on hold
You can put a conference on hold, allowing the other two
people to continue speaking to each other by pressing ≥.
You can reconnect to the conference by pressing either of the
held line buttons. For the M7100 telephone, press ≥.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 59
Splitting a conference
You can talk with one person while the other person is on hold.
You can activate this feature on all Norstar and Business
Series terminals except for M7100 or T7100 models.
1. Press the line button of the person you want to speak to.
The other person is automatically put on hold.
On an M7100 or a T7100 set:
1. Press ≤£‹. The first party is on hold.
2. Press ≥, if necessary, to switch parties.
You can re-establish the conference.
1. Press ≤‹.
2. Take the held call off hold. This is not necessary.
Removing yourself from a conference
You can remove yourself from a conference, and connect the
other two callers through your Norstar system.
1. Enter the Transfer feature code ≤‡‚.
When you remove yourself from a conference using the
Transfer feature, and both callers are from outside your
system, one of the callers must have called you on a disconnect
supervised line, or the call is be disconnected.
Displays
3 parties only
P0992640 02
You are trying to add a fourth party to your
conference call, or to join two conferences
together. Release one call from the
conference before adding another, or keep
the two conferences separate.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
60 / Answering calls
Conf. on hold
You have put a conference call on hold.
Conference busy
You have tried to make a conference call, but
your system is already handling its maximum
number of conference calls.
Line001
You are on a conference with the two lines or
telephones shown. You can drop out of the
conference and leave the other two parties
connected (Unsupervised Conference) by
pressing TRANSFER or entering the Transfer
feature code.
221
TRANSFER
Press held line
You have activated the Conference feature
with one call active and another on hold.
Press the line of the call on hold to bring that
person into the conference.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Listening to a call as a group
To allow people in your office to listen in on a call using
Group Listening, press ≤°‚¤.
You hear the voice of the caller through the speaker of your
set. Continue to speak to the caller through the telephone
receiver. The microphone of your set is off, so the caller does
not hear people in your office.
Canceling Group Listening
Group Listening is canceled automatically when you hang up
or when you press ≤£°‚¤.
Tip - Keep the receiver away from the speaker, or you may
hear feedback. The higher the volume, the more the feedback.
Press ® to prevent feedback when hanging up.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 61
Using Handsfree/Mute
The ability to use Handsfree must be turned on or off for each
telephone. The type of Handsfree can be changed. Refer to
Changing Handsfree for a telephone on page 63.
You must turn on Handsfree for a telephone to be able to use
a headset.
Answering calls without lifting the receiver
1. Press the line button for the ringing call.
This step is not necessary if you have a prime line assigned
to your telephone.
2. Press the button labeled Handsfree/mute. The internal
microphone and speaker of the telephone automatically
turn on.
Handsfree is not available for M7100 or T7100 sets.
Tip - Direct your voice toward the telephone. The closer you
are to the telephone, the easier it is for the microphone to
transmit your voice clearly to your listener.
Making calls without lifting the receiver
1. Press the button labeled Handsfree/mute.
If you do not have a prime line assigned to your telephone,
press a line button.
The internal microphone and speaker of the set are
automatically turned on.
2. Dial your call.
3. Speak normally.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
62 / Answering calls
Muting the set
1. Press the button labeled Handsfree/mute to switch off the
telephone microphone so that you can speak privately to
someone in your office while you are on a handsfree call.
2. Press the button labeled Handsfree/mute to turn the
microphone back on again and continue your handsfree
call.
Changing a regular call to handsfree
1. Press the button labeled Handsfree/mute.
2. Hang up the receiver.
Changing a handsfree to a regular call
Lift the receiver.
Using Handsfree
The indicator next to the button labeled Handsfree/mute is
solid when you have Handsfree turned on.
The indicator next to the button labeled Handsfree/mute is
solid when you mute the microphone.
Note: Other models of sets have only one button for both
functions. In this case, when the set is on handsfree and
the microphone is on, the light is solid. If the set is on
handsfree and the microphone is off, the light flashes.
Wait for your caller to finish speaking before you speak. The
microphone and speaker cannot both be on at once. The voice
of your caller voice may be cut off if you both speak at the
same time. Noises such as a tapping pencil could be loud
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 63
enough to turn on your microphone and cut off the incoming
sounds.
To prevent a possible echo, keep the area around your
telephone free of paper and other objects that might screen
your microphone. Turning down the microphone volume —
press the left end of √ while speaking — prevents
echoes. When you change the volume level, both the
microphone and speaker volume are adjusted. This is needed
in order to prevent feedback problems.
Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise, such
as an air conditioner, is behind it. This limits the amount of
disruptive background noise.
Tip - In open-concept environments, use the receiver when
handsfree communication is not necessary or when you need
privacy during a call. Another option is to use a headset.
Changing Handsfree for a telephone
You can program the type of Handsfree used with each
telephone or activate Handsfree Answerback.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
64 / Answering calls
5. Press ‘ three times.
6. Choose a setting at Handsfree: using the CHANGE button.
There are three ways to set Handsfree for an individual
telephone:
Handsfree is not available to the telephone.
Handsfree:None
CHANGE
You can make or answer a call without
Handsfree:Auto
CHANGE having to pick up the receiver or press the
button marked Handsfree/Mute. The internal
microphone of the telephone and the
speaker turn on automatically when you
press a line or intercom button to make or
answer a call.
A standard version of Handsfree described
Handsfree:Std
CHANGE Using Handsfree/Mute on page 61.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Both Auto and standard Handsfree allow you to use a headset
with a Norstar telephone or a Business Series Terminal.
A Handsfree/Mute button is automatically assigned to a
telephone that is programmed with Handsfree and is always
located in the lower right-hand corner of the numeric dialpad.
Handsfree Answerback
Handsfree Answerback allows you to answer a voice call
without lifting the receiver.
This feature is always turned off for an M7100 or the T7100
set.
You can turn Handsfree Answerback on or off for a telephone
that is programmed to use Handsfree.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 65
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘four times.
6. Choose a setting (Yes or No) at HF answerback: using the
CHANGE button.
Turning Privacy on or off for a call
≤°‹
Lines in your system can be configured to have automatic
privacy. If a line is not programmed with privacy, anyone with
the line assigned to their telephone can join your call by
pressing the line button. If a line is programmed with privacy,
only one person at a time can use the line.
Privacy control cannot be used on internal or conference calls.
When another telephone joins a call, the participants on the
call hear a tone, and a message appears on the Norstar display.
You cannot join a call without this tone being heard.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
66 / Answering calls
Creating a conference by releasing privacy
If a line is programmed with privacy, you can turn privacy off
to allow another person with the same line to join in your
conversation and form a conference. All the rules applicable to
a conference apply except there is only one line in use, instead
of the usual two. This means that you cannot split a conference
set up using Privacy.
1. Press ≤°‹.
2. Tell the other person to press the line button and join your
conversation.
Only two Norstar or Business Series Terminal sets, in addition
to the external caller, can take part in this kind of conference.
Making a call private
≤°‹
If a line is programmed not to have privacy, you can turn
privacy on for a call, preventing other people with the same
line from joining your conversation.
Checking call length using Call Duration Timer
≤‡‡
With this feature you can see how long you spent on your last
call, or how long you have been on your present call.
Displays
221 02:47
The display shows the last call you made, or
the current call, and the total elapsed time.
Line001 01:45
You parked your last call. The display shows
the period the call was parked. This display
only shows when the call is active at, or has
just been released by, your telephone.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Answering calls / 67
Disconnecting by accident
If you accidentally drop the receiver back into the telephone
cradle while answering a call, you can quickly retrieve the call.
Pick up the receiver again or press the button labeled
Handsfree/mute within one second to be reconnected to your
call.
Time
≤°‚‹
Use this feature to display the current date and time while you
are on a call.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Making calls
There are many ways to make a call, depending on the
programming and the type of call, as follows:
•
Pick up the receiver and dial. The Norstar system supports
three methods of dialing. See Changing how you dial your
calls on page 72.
Pick up the receiver, press a line button, and dial (if the call
is not on your prime line).
Press the button labeled Handsfree/mute and dial to talk
without using the receiver. See Using Handsfree/Mute on
page 61.
Press the button labeled Handsfree/mute, then press a line
button, and dial to talk without the receiver if the call is not
on your prime line.
Press a line button and dial to talk without the receiver if
Automatic Handsfree is assigned to your telephone.
Use one of the features that make dialing easier. See Time
savers for making calls on page 79.
•
•
•
•
•
Displays
221 busy
PRIORITY
9__
QUIT
LATER
BKSP
95551234
The telephone you have called has no
internal lines available. Press LATER to use
the Ring Again or Message features or press
PRIORITY to make a priority call.
You are dialing using Pre-dial. To erase an
incorrect digit, press the left end of
√ or BKSP . When the number is
complete, select a line or lift the receiver.
This prompt remains on your display as long
TRANSFER as you are on a call you have dialed. To
transfer the call, press TRANSFER .
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Making calls / 69
Your telephone is already connected to the
telephone you are trying to call. Check your
active line buttons, and return to that call.
Already joined
Calling 221
PRIORITY
LATER
Wait for the telephone to be answered. If no
one answers, press LATER to use the Ring
Again (page 76) or Message (page 117)
feature, or press PRIORITY to make a priority
call.
Can't ring again
You cannot use Ring Again on your current
call. You can only use Ring Again while you
have a busy signal on an internal call or line
pool request or while an internal call is
ringing.
Do not disturb
PRIORITY
LATER
The telephone you are calling has Do Not
Disturb turned on. Press LATER to use the
Ring Again or Messages features, or press
PRIORITY to make a priority call.
Expensive route
You have dialed a number, but the least
expensive route that the system is
programmed to use is busy. Unless you
release the call, it goes through on a more
expensive route.
Hidden number
The last number you dialed or the number
you saved for Saved Number Redial was a
speed dial number that displayed a name
rather than the number. The number is dialed
correctly, but you cannot see it.
Line denied
You have attempted to use the private line
assigned to another user.
Enter the digits of the number you want to
Line001
TRANSFER dial.
No last number
You have not dialed an external telephone
number since the last power interruption or
system reset.
No line selected
Either you have no prime line or your prime
line is busy. Select a line manually before
dialing.
Not in service
You have entered the number of a telephone
that is not in service.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
70 / Making calls
The telephone you have called is on another
On another call
LATER call. Press LATER to use the Ring Again or
Message features.
The call you are trying to make has been
restricted in programming. A possible reason
is time-of-day restrictions on certain calls.
Restricted call
Ring Again?
YES
NO
Press YES to use Ring Again. Press NO to
EXIT send a message. See Sending messages on
page 117 and Turning on Ring Again on
page 76.
Select a line
Either you have no prime line, or the prime
line is in use, or the line programmed for an
autodial number, speed dial number, or
Hotline is in use. Select a line and dial again.
Send message?
YES
NO
Press YES to send a message. See
Messages.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Choosing a line using a line button
You have one line button for each line assigned to your
telephone. Press the line button to select the line you want to
answer or use to make a call. Having several line buttons
allows you immediate access to more than one line.
The M7100 and T7100 sets each have two intercom paths
which are used instead of line buttons to answer and make
calls. Each set can be assigned two lines. You can press ≥
to switch between two calls, one active and one on hold.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Making calls / 71
Line pools
A line pool is a group of external lines that can be shared by
many telephones. You can use a line in a line pool to make an
external call.
The MICS system can have 15 line pools, and a telephone can
be programmed to access any number of them.
A line pool access code is a number you dial to get a line pool.
The access code can be up to four digits long. You can have
several different line pools for your system, each one giving
you access to a different set of external lines. It is one way of
sharing lines across telephones in a system.
Your installer or customer service representative programs the
line pool access codes and gives each telephone access to a
line pool.
Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool access
codes for the line pools their telephones can use.
Using a line pool to make a call
Use this process to make a line pool call:
1. Press ≤fl›.
2. Enter a line pool access code.
If you have a free internal line, you can make a call using a line
pool without entering the feature code first.
1. Select an internal line (intercom).
2. Dial the line pool access code.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
72 / Making calls
Tip - If no lines are available in the line pool, you can use Ring
Again at the busy tone. You are notified when a line in the line
pool becomes available. See Using Ring Again on page 76.
Programming a memory button with a line pool feature code
When you program a button with the line pool feature code,
you must enter a line pool access code after the feature code.
The programmed line pool button accesses a specific line pool,
not the line pool feature. See Programming feature buttons on
page 136 for more information.
If you program a button with an indicator to access a line pool,
when all the lines in a line pool are busy, the indicator for the
line pool button turns on. The indicator turns off when a line
becomes available.
Making calls from an ISDN terminal
ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys as do
Norstar telephones. To make an outgoing call from an ISDN
terminal, access an external line by entering a line pool code
or by using the ARS feature.
Changing how you dial your calls
To change how how you dial your calls, use this feature:
1. Press ≤•°¤.
2. Press £ or NEXT until the dialing mode you want appears.
3. Press ≥ or OK to select the displayed dialing mode.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Making calls / 73
The dialing modes feature code cannot be programmed onto a
memory button.
Using Standard dial
Standard dial allows you to make a call by selecting a line and
dialing the number. If you have a prime line, it is selected
automatically when you lift the receiver or press the button
labeled Handsfree/mute.
You cannot use Standard dial on an M7100 or a T7100 set
unless you pick up the receiver first. If you have this type of
set, use the Automatic dial or Pre-dial feature for on-hook
dialing.
Using Automatic dial
Automatic dial allows you to dial a number without selecting
a line. Your prime line is selected as soon as you start dialing
a number.
Automatic dial does not work if your telephone has no prime
line or if your prime line is in use.
Telephones connected to an analog terminal adapter (ATA)
cannot use Automatic dial.
Using Pre-dial
Pre-dial allows you to enter a telephone number, check it, then
change it before actually making the call. The call is not dialed
until you select a line or line pool, or pick up the receiver. You
can pre-dial both external and internal numbers. You must,
however, select the correct type of line (external or internal)
for the type of number you have entered. See the Tip on the
next page.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
74 / Making calls
Tip - If your telephone starts ringing while you are pre-dialing
a number, you can stop the ringing by turning on Do Not
Disturb (≤°fi). This does not affect numbers you are
entering.
You cannot pre-dial a telephone number if all the lines on your
telephone are busy.
When the internal number you have called is busy
There are a couple of methods you can use if the set you are
calling is currently busy.
Priority Call
If you get a busy signal or a Do Not Disturb message when you
call someone in your office, you can interrupt them. Use this
feature for urgent calls only.
Tip - Priority calls cannot be made to Hunt Group DNs. For
more information on Hunt Groups see Programming Hunt
Groups on page 157.
Making a priority call
1. Press ≤fl·.
2. Wait for a connection, then speak.
A person who receives a priority call while on another call has
eight seconds to accept or block the call. For information on
blocking calls see Stopping calls from ringing at your
telephone: Do Not Disturb (DND) on page 190. If the person
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Making calls / 75
does nothing, the priority call feature puts their active call,
including conference parties, on Exclusive Hold and connects
your call.
Giving a telephone the ability to make priority calls
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ nine times. The display shows Priority
call:.
6. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No)
Displays
Call blocked
You tried to place a priority call to another
Norstar telephone. The person you called
has blocked your call. Try to call later.
Please wait
The party you are calling has eight seconds
to decide whether to accept or reject your
priority call.
Priority denied
The telephone you are calling has already
received a priority call or is unable to receive
priority calls.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
76 / Making calls
You can make a priority call only while your telephone
displays:
221 busy
PRIORITY
LATER
Calling 221
PRIORITY
LATER
The set you are trying to call has call on all
assigned lines.
Do not disturb
PRIORITY
LATER
The set you are trying to call has the Do Not
Disturb feature activated.
On another call
PRIORITY
LATER
The set you are trying to call is busy because
the person is on another line.
Using Ring Again
Use Ring Again when you call someone on your Norstar
system and their telephone is busy or there is no answer. Ring
Again can tell you when they hang up or next use their
telephone. You can use Ring Again to tell you when a busy
line pool becomes available.
Tip - The Ring Again feature cannot be used when calling a
Hunt Group DN. For more information on Hunt Groups see
Programming Hunt Groups on page 157
Turning on Ring Again
1. Press ≤¤ before you hang up.
Using Ring Again cancels any previous Ring Again requests
at your telephone.
Canceling Ring Again
1. Press ≤£¤ to cancel a Ring Again request.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Making calls / 77
Displays
Can't ring again
You cannot use Ring Again on your current
call. You can only use Ring Again while you
have a busy signal on an internal call or line
pool request, or while an internal call is
ringing.
Ring Again?
YES
NO
Press YES to use Ring Again. Press NO if you
prefer to send a message.
P0992640 02
EXIT
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
78 / Making calls
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Time savers for making calls
Storing a number on a memory button for Autodial
You can program memory buttons for one-touch dialing of
internal or external telephone numbers.
Buttons used for lines, answer or Handsfree/Mute cannot be
used as autodial buttons.
If the power to your Norstar system is off for more than three
days, autodial numbers, and some other system programming,
may be lost from the memory.
Adding an autodial button
Use these features to program external and internal numbers.
1. Press ≤•⁄ to program an external number.
Press ≤•¤ to program an internal number.
2. Choose a button and then enter the number as if you were
dialing it.
When programming Autodial you can use:
•
Last Number Redial
•
Saved Number Redial
•
destination codes — choose ∆ as the line
•
host system signalling
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
80 / Time savers for making calls
Choosing a line for Autodial
To include a line selection for an external number, press the
line or intercom button before you enter the number. To select
a line pool, press a programmed line pool button, or press the
button labelled Intercom and enter a line pool access code.
If you select a line before pressing the autodial button, the call
goes out on the line you have selected instead of the line that
is part of the autodialer programming.
For the M7100 and T7100 sets, an external autodialer can be
programmed only by using a line and not a line pool.
Tip - If you do not include a line selection in an autodial
number, the call uses your prime line (if you have one).
Using intercom as the line for Autodial
If you press the button labelled Intercom as the line for an
external autodial number, you must include a valid line pool
access code or a destination code. If line pool access codes or
destination codes are changed, remember to reprogram
autodial numbers.
Displays
987___
QUIT
Continue to enter digits until the number is
BKSP
OK complete. Press √ or BKSP to
erase an incorrect digit. Press ≥ or OK
when you are finished.
Autodial full
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
The memory allotted to autodial numbers in
your Norstar system is full.
P0992640 02
Time savers for making calls / 81
While programming external Autodial, you
erased the button by pressing ≥ or OK
before entering any digits.
Button erased
Enter digits
QUIT
OK
Enter the number you want to program.
Choose the line first, if necessary, then enter
the number exactly as if you were making a
call.
Intercom #: ___
QUIT
Enter the internal telephone number you
want to program.
Invalid number
You are programming an internal autodial
button and have entered a number that is not
an internal number on your system.
Enter a valid internal number.
If the number you are entering is a
destination code, use external autodial.
Press a button
QUIT
Press the memory button you want to
program.
Program and HOLD
Enter the number you want to program onto
the button, then press ≥ .
Program and OK
QUIT
Programmed
OK
Enter the number you want to program onto
the button, then press ≥ or OK. You may
include a line or line pool selection in an
autodial sequence by selecting the line
before entering any digits.
The number is stored on the button.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
82 / Time savers for making calls
Using Last Number Redial
Press ≤fi to redial the last external number you dialed.
Last Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits.
Tip - If you have a programmed Last Number Redial button,
you can use Button Inquiry (≤•‚), then press the Last
Number Redial button followed by £) to check the last
number before you dial it.
Preventing a telephone from using Last Number
Redial
Last Number Redial can be restricted at individual telephones.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See A map for working in programming on page 22 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
5. Press ‘ three times. The display shows
Restrictions.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Allow last no:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Time savers for making calls / 83
Displays
Hidden number
No last number
The last number you dialed was a speed dial
number that displayed a name rather than
the number. The number is dialed correctly,
but you cannot see it.
You have not dialed an external telephone
number since the last power interruption or
system reset.
Tip - You can copy a number onto an autodial button using
Last Number Redial.
Using Speed Dial
Norstar provides two types of speed dialing: system and
personal.
•
System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign a
maximum of 200 three-digit speed dial codes (001-255) to
the external numbers your co-workers call most
frequently.
•
User Speed Dial programming allows individuals to
program a maximum of 24 speed dial numbers that are
personal to their telephone. These numbers also have
three-digit codes (256-279)
Speed dial numbers are subject to the same restriction filters as
regularly dialed numbers. Your installer or customer service
representative can program system speed dial numbers to
bypass dialing restrictions.
Speed dial numbers may include host system signaling codes.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
84 / Time savers for making calls
Making a speed dial call
Tip - There is no difference between using User Speed Dial
and using System Speed Dial. They differ only in how you
program them.
1. Press ≤‚ to quickly dial external telephone numbers
that have been programmed onto speed dial codes.
2. Enter the appropriate three-digit speed dial code.
Changing and adding System Speed Dials
The system coordinator assigns numbers to System Speed Dial
codes for the entire system. See Adding or changing a system speed
dial on page 31.
Adding or changing User Speed Dial
To add or change a User Speed Dial number on your
telephone:
1. Press ≤•›.
2. Enter a three-digit code from 256 to 279 that you want to
associate with a telephone number.
3. To include a line selection for this number, press the line
or intercom button. To select a line pool, press a
programmed line pool button, or press the button labelled as
intercom and enter a line pool access code.
For the M7100 and T7100 sets, you can select only a line
pool.
4. Enter the number you want to program.
5. Press ≥ or OK.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Time savers for making calls / 85
Displays
01:9___
CANCL
Continue entering the number you want to
BKSP
Enter digits
QUIT
OK program. You can change the number by
pressing BKSP or √. When you are
finished, press ≥ or OK.
Enter the telephone number you want to
OK program exactly as if you were dialing it
normally. When you are finished, press ≥
or OK.
Invalid code
You have entered a code outside the code
range (001-255 for system, 256-279 for
personal).
No number stored
There is no number stored on the speed dial
code you have dialed.
Program and HOLD
If you want to program a line or line pool
selection for this speed dial number, select
the line or line pool. Otherwise, enter the
telephone number exactly as if you were
dialing it normally. When you are finished,
press ≥.
Program and OK
QUIT
If you want to program a line or line pool
OK selection for this speed dial number, select
the line or line pool. Otherwise, enter the
telephone number you want to program
exactly as if you were dialing it normally.
When you are finished, press OK.
Select a line
There is no line associated with the speed
dial number you are trying to use. Select a
free external line or line pool and enter the
speed dial feature code again.
Unknown number
The system cannot dial the number stored.
Reprogram the number.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
86 / Time savers for making calls
Using Saved Number Redial
≤fl‡
You can use this feature while you are on an external call that
you dialed to save the number so that you can call it again later.
Each telephone can save one number at a time with Saved
Number Redial, not one number for each line.
Tip - You can copy a number onto an autodial button using
Saved Number Redial.
Saved Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits.
Dialing a saved number
Press ≤fl‡ when you are not on a call.
If you have a programmed Saved Number Redial button, you
can use Button Inquiry (≤•‚) to check the last number
before you dial it.
Blocking Saved Number Redial
Saved Number Redial can be restricted at individual
telephones.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See A map for working in programming on page 22 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Time savers for making calls / 87
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
5. Press ‘ three times. The display shows
Restrictions.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘ twice. The display shows Allow saved
no:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
Displays
Hidden number
You have saved a speed dial number that
displays a name rather than the number. The
number is dialed correctly, but you cannot
see it.
No number saved
You have tried to save the number of an
incoming call. You can only save numbers
that you have dialed yourself.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Handling many calls at once
Using Hold
You can temporarily suspend a call by pressing ≥.
When a call is on hold, its indicator flashes on all telephones
that have access to the line. The call can be retrieved from any
of these telephones.
On the M7100 and T7100 sets, ≥ alternates between two
lines. One line is active, the other is on hold. These sets cannot
retrieve a call placed on hold by another telephone.
Tip - Answered Hunt Group calls can be placed on hold at the
answering Norstar set. For more information on Hunt Groups
see Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
Retrieving a held call
You can connect to a call on hold by pressing the flashing line
button of the held call.
Holding automatically
If your line has been programmed with full autohold, you can
switch from one call to another and have your calls put on hold
automatically.
Press the line button of the caller you want to speak to. Your
current caller is put on hold automatically.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Handling many calls at once / 89
Listening on hold
If you have been put on hold, you can hang up the receiver
while you wait for the other person to return.
1. Press ≥.
2. Hang up the receiver.
3. Press the line button of the call. You may hear indications
from the far end that you are on hold, for example, tones or
music.
4. When the person you were talking to returns you hear them
through your telephone speaker. Lift the receiver and talk.
Tip - If Automatic Handsfree has been assigned to your
telephone, you can use the Handsfree/Mute feature instead of
Listen on Hold.
Holding a call exclusively
You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that it can be retrieved
only at your telephone.
Press ≤‡· or ≤≥. The line appears busy on all
other telephones, and the call cannot be picked up by anyone
else in the office.
Displays
On hold: LINENAM
P0992640 02
You have placed one or more calls on hold.
The name of the line that has been held the
longest is displayed.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
90 / Handling many calls at once
Using Call Queuing
≤°‚⁄
If you have more than one call ringing at your telephone, use
this feature code to choose the call that has the highest priority.
Call Queuing answers incoming external calls before callback,
camped, and transferred calls.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Transferring calls
Using the transfer feature
Transfer allows you to direct a call to a telephone in your
Norstar system, within the network, or external to the network.
Transferring a call
1. Press ≤‡‚.
2. Call the person to whom you want to transfer the call.
3. If you want to talk to the person to whom you are
transferring the call, wait for them to answer, and speak to
them before proceeding.
4. When you are ready to complete the transfer, press ® or
JOIN.
You cannot use Last Number Redial, Saved Number Redial, a
speed dial code, Priority Call or Ring Again to dial the number
for a transfer.
Depending on how a private network call is routed, it may not
always be possible for the system to return a transferred call to
you if the transferred call is not answered. When transferring
a call to a private network destination, stay on the line until the
person to whom you are transferring the call answers.
You cannot use the Line Pool feature code to access a line pool
for a transfer. To use a line pool, use a programmed line pool
button, or press the key labelled Intercom and enter a line pool
access code.
If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on
an external line, and you transfer a call on that line without
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
92 / Transferring calls
announcing the transfer, the auxiliary ringer rings for the
transferred call.
Transferring external calls
If an external call is transferred to a busy telephone, or not
answered after a few rings, the call automatically rings again
at the telephone from which it was transferred, and the display
indicates that the telephone was busy or that no one answered.
When transferring an external call to an external number, the
external call you are trying to transfer must be an incoming
call on a disconnect supervised line.
While on a conference call, you can remove yourself from the
conference and connect the other two callers using the
Transfer feature. However, if both of the other people are from
outside the system, at least one of the outside callers must have
called you and both of the outside calls must be on disconnect
supervision lines.
Note: Transfer via Hold on DID lines is not supported. Once
a call is answered the line appearances on all other sets
are free immediately to take other calls. This allows a
greater number of calls to be received. Use the Call Park
feature to transfer a call.
In certain situations, you may experience lower volume levels
when transferring an external call to an external person, or
when transferring two external callers from a conference call.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Transferring calls / 93
Canceling a transfer
You can reconnect to the person you are trying to transfer at
any time before the transfer is complete.
1. Press ≤£‡‚ or CANCL.
2. If you are not reconnected to your original call, press ®
and then press the line key of the original call, which is
now on hold.
Displays
221>222
CANCL
RETRY
You are talking to the person you want to
JOIN transfer the call to. Press RETRY if you decide
to transfer the call to someone else. Press
® or JOIN to transfer the call.
The person to whom you tried to transfer a
221 no reply
CALLBACK call did not answer. Press CALLBACK or the
flashing line button to reconnect to the call.
On the 7100 sets, lift the receiver.
The person to whom you tried to transfer a
Do not disturb
CANCL
RETRY JOIN call has Do Not Disturb active on their
telephone. Press JOIN to transfer the call
anyway. Press RETRY to transfer the call to
someone else. Press CANCL or the flashing
line button to reconnect to the call (on the
M7100 or T7100 sets, press ≤£‡‚).
Invalid number
CANCL
RETRY
You entered an invalid internal number.
Press RETRY and enter the number again.
Line001 hung up
The external caller you were transferring
hung up before the transfer was complete.
Line001>221
CANCL
RETRY
Press JOIN to transfer the call on line 001 to
JOIN telephone 221. Press RETRY if, after talking
to the person at extension 221, you decide to
transfer the call to someone else.
Not in service
CANCL
RETRY
P0992640 02
The telephone to which you are trying to
transfer a call is out of service.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
94 / Transferring calls
Restricted call
CANCL
RETRY
You cannot transfer the call because of
telephone or line restrictions.
Still in trnsfer
CANCL
RETRY
Complete the transfer in progress before you
access a new feature, answer another
alerting call, or select an outgoing line.
Transfer denied
CANCL
RETRY
Your transfer cannot be completed for one of
these reasons:
• All the resources needed to perform a
transfer are in use. Try again later.
• You have tried to transfer an external
call to another external party. Some
restrictions apply.
• You cannot transfer a conference call.
Transfer to:2___
CANCL
RETRY
Press RETRY if you entered the wrong
internal number or if the person to whom you
are transferring the call is unavailable.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Using Camp-on
You can transfer an external call to another telephone within
the system, even if all of its lines are busy.
1. Press ≤°¤.
2. Dial the number of the telephone you want to camp the call
to.
Camped calls appear on a line button on the receiving
telephone, if one is available. If there is no line button
available, you receive a message on the display and hear Camp
tones.
Each set can handle only one camped call at a time.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Transferring calls / 95
Displays
You tried to camp a call to a telephone that
221 Camp max
CALLBACK already has a camped call. The call has
come back to you. Press the CALLBACK
button or the line button to reconnect to the
call.
On the M7100 or the T7100 set, just pick up
the receiver.
The person to whom you redirected a call
221 DND
CALLBACK has Do Not Disturb active on the telephone.
The call has come back to you. Press the
CALLBACK button or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On the M7100
telephone, just pick up the receiver.
Camp denied
You have tried to camp an internal call. You
can only camp external calls.
Camp to:
CANCL
Dial the number of the internal telephone to
which the call is sent.
The telephone to which you camped a call
Camped: 221
CALLBACK did not answer the call. The call has come
back to you. Press CALLBACK or the line
button to reconnect to the call. On the M7100
or T7100 sets, just pick up the receiver.
Line001 hung up
A call you camped has come back to you, but
the caller hung up before you could
reconnect.
The telephone to which you have camped a
Not in service
CALLBACK call is out of service or is being used for
programming. The call has come back to
you. Press CALLBACK or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On the M7100 or T7100
sets, just pick up the receiver.
Release a call
The line that the camped call is on is in use
or that line does not appear at your
telephone. Release the line or release an
internal line.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
96 / Transferring calls
Parking a call
You can suspend a call so that it can be retrieved from any
telephone in your system.
1. Press ≤‡›.
2. Use the Page feature (≤fl‚) or press PAGE to
announce the retrieval code displayed by your telephone.
Retrieving a parked call
1. Select an internal line.
On an M7100 or a T7100 set, pick up the receiver.
2. Dial the Call Park retrieval code.
Using Call Park
When you park a call, the system assigns one of 25 codes for
the retrieval of the call. These codes consist of the Call Park
prefix, which may be any digit from 1 to 9, and a two-digit call
number between 01 and 25. For example, if the Call Park
prefix is 1, the first parked call is assigned Call Park retrieval
code 101. The call park prefix is assigned during system
programming. Check your Modular ICS Programming Record
if you are unsure about what range your system uses.
The Norstar system assigns Call Park codes in sequence, from
the lowest to the highest, until all the codes are used. This
round-robin approach means that a greater variety of codes are
used, which makes it easier for a call to reach the right person
when more than one incoming call is parked.
The highest call number, which is made up of the Call Park
prefix followed by 25, is used only by T7100/M7100
telephones, analog telephones, or devices connected to the
system using an analog terminal adapter (ATA) or an Analog
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Transferring calls / 97
Station Module (ASM). Analog telephones or devices cannot
use the other Call Park codes.
Your installer or customer service representative programs
both the Call Park prefix and the delay before parked calls are
returned to the originating telephone. External calls parked for
longer than the programmed delay are returned to your
telephone.
Tip - Answered Hunt Group calls are parked in the same
manner as other calls. For more information on Hunt Groups
see Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
Call Park can be disabled by your installer or customer service
representative.
Displays
Already parked
The person you were talking to has already
parked your call. You cannot park the same
call.
No call to park
You have attempted to use Call Park with no
active call on your telephone. If the call you
want to park is on hold, reconnect to it before
you park it.
Invalid number
You have entered an invalid retrieval code.
No call on: 101
There was no call on the retrieval code you
entered.
Park denied
You have tried to park a conference call. Split
the conference and park the calls separately.
The person who retrieves the calls can
reconnect the conference.
Parked on: 402
PAGE
EXIT
Record the code shown. Use Page
(≤fl‚) or press PAGE to announce the
call and its retrieval code.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
98 / Transferring calls
Parking full
All available retrieval codes are in use.
Transfer the call or take a message instead.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Using system-wide call appearance (SWCA)
This feature allows a call to maintain an appearance on the
System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) buttons to a group of
users for the life of the call. SWCA codes can be assigned to
up to 16 program buttons with indicators on each telephone in
a group.
See “Programming a feature code onto a memory button” on
page 136 for general information about setting or changing
key programming for a telephone. SWCA keys can be
assigned to memory keys using ≤•‹ to assign the
SWCA feature codes: ≤•fi¤‚ to ≤•fi‹fi.
Refer to the Module ICS 6.0 Installer Guide for information
about programming buttons through the programming
interface.
Note: Telephones without assigned SWCA keys can still
retrieve a SWCA call by entering the feature code that
was used to park the call, providing that they have a free
intercom key with which to accept the call. However,
there is no indication on these telephones to show which
codes were used to park which call. This information
can be communicated by the person who parked the call
by using a voice call or by using the Page feature to
provide a verbal alert.
A call can also be parked on the system by entering a
SWCA code, if there are no assigned SWCA user keys
on the telephone.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Transferring calls / 99
Each group telephone must either have a line appearance of the
call coming in, or a free intercom button to be able to retrieve
a SWCA call. The number of SWCA keys that can be assigned
will depend on available buttons on the telephone. T7316 and
T7324N telephones provide the broadest use of this feature.
Companion, M7000/T7000 and M7100N/T7100 telephones
do not have line or intercom buttons, therefore, they cannot be
assigned SWCA lines.
Your system administrator can configure the SWCA line
buttons during the initial configuration of your telephone, in
which case, you should have a list of which codes were used.
Otherwise, you can use the Supervisor password to assign
codes to memory keys with indicators.
Tips - Since SWCA keys use the park feature, check with
your system administrator to ensure that park is turned on for
your system.
A SWCA call on park that exceeds the park timeout timer is
released from the SWCA button and rings again at the
original telephone.
Auto Hold
Your telephone must be set to have Full autohold if you want
to use SWCA lines so that a call automatically gets placed on
hold if the user answers a second call. If the telephone does not
do this, the user can change the system setting at the telephone
using ≤‡‹.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
100 / Transferring calls
Incoming calls
When you answer an external call, the system can react in one
of two ways, depending on what settings were specified in
system programming:
•
the call may be transferred automatically to a free SWCA
key when you answer the call. To park the call, and free
your line, press the SWCA key or press ≥. The call
becomes available to any other telephone that has that
SWCA key.
OR
•
you may need to press a free SWCA button to transfer the
call manually to a SWCA key. In this case, when you
transfer the call, the call parks on the line, and the line the
call came in on is released.
When you put a call on hold, the system can react in one of two
ways if you have SWCA keys defined:
•
when you put the call on Hold, the call transfers to a free
SWCA key and all the other extensions with
corresponding SWCA keys display a flashing indicator
beside the button. The call can be picked up at any other
extension. If the call automatically transferred to a SWCA
key when it was answered, then this option puts the call on
hold at the same key.
OR
•
when you put the call on Hold, it stays on hold on the line
that it came in on. To make the call available to other
extensions, press a free SWCA key.
Calls with appearances on SWCA keys show a solid indicator
when the call is active. On the extension where the call is
active, an Intercom or Line button also becomes active.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Transferring calls / 101
SWCA indicators, call status states (auto assign)
Call is answered
and automatically
assigns to a SWCA
key.
Call is put on Hold.
The SWCA
indicator flashes at
all extensions. The
indicator beside the
line key disappears,
freeing up the line
Call is retrieved.
An indicator appears beside
the Intercom button. The
SWCA indicator becomes
solid on all extensions,
indicating that the call is
active.
Line 1
Line 1
Line 1
Line 2
Line 2
Line 2
SWCA1
SWCA1
SWCA1
SWCA4
SWCA2
SWCA2
SWCA2
SWCA5
SWCA3
SWCA3
SWCA3
SWCA6
Intercom
Intercom
Outgoing calls
When you make an outgoing call using the intercom key on
your telephone, the call is automatically transferred to the first
available SWCA key. Solid indicators appear beside the
intercom button and the SWCA key on your telephone. All
other telephones in the group also see a solid indicator beside
the SWCA key, indicating that the line for that key is in use. If
you put the call on hold (or press the SWCA key), the SWCA
key indicator fast-flashes on your telephone, and slow-flashes
on the other telephones in the group. The call can then be
picked up by any other telephone in the group.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
102 / Transferring calls
No free call keys
If all the SWCA keys are currently occupied when a new call
comes in, you can still put the call on Hold.
•
If a SWCA key has been freed up between the time you
answered the call, and when you want to put the call on
Hold, the call will transfer to the free SWCA key, or you
can manually transfer it to a free SWCA key. The call will
act as described in Incoming calls on page 100.
•
If all SWCA keys are still occupied when you put the new
call on Hold, the call will be held at your telephone on the
line it came in on. When a SWCA key becomes free, you
can take the call off hold and press the free SWCA key so
the call has a group-wide appearance.
These principles also apply to outgoing calls.
Using Callback
When you direct a call you have answered to another
telephone, the system monitors the call to make sure it is
answered. If no one answers the call within a set length of
time, the system directs it back to you.
Callback generates a variety of displays. Most occur after a set
delay and are listed in the index. Some occur immediately if
the telephone to which you are directing a call is out of service
or otherwise unavailable. These are listed with the descriptions
of the specific features such as Transfer or Camp-on.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Forwarding your calls
Forwarding your calls to another Norstar telephone
Use this feature to forward your calls within your system or
network.
1. Press ≤›.
2. Enter the number of the internal telephone to which you
want your calls forwarded.
Use Line Redirection to forward calls outside the system. Line
redirection takes precedence over Call Forward.
Canceling Call Forward
1. Press ≤£›.
Using Call Forward at your telephone
When you use ≤›, all calls go to the destination you
select, regardless of how Forward on busy and Forward no
answer are programmed.
Tip - If your Norstar set is a member of a Hunt Group, the Call
Forward all calls setting is overridden by the Hunt Group
routing for Hunt Group calls. For more information on Hunt
Groups see Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
If the telephone to which you forwarded your calls does not
have the same external lines as your telephone, the forwarded
calls appear on intercom buttons.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
104 / Forwarding your calls
If a call is forwarded, it does not ring but the line indicator
flashes on your telephone. You can answer the call by pressing
the button next to the flashing indicator.
Tip - Beware of creating call-forward loops
If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward their
calls to one another, be aware that it is possible to set up
forward loops where a call is forwarded from one telephone to
another in a circle, and is never answered anywhere.
Overriding Call Forward
If you call someone who has their calls forwarded to you, your
call rings at that set telephone even though they are forwarding
their calls to you.
Changing the automatic Call Forward settings for a
telephone
Call forwarding occurs automatically when a call is not
answered or the line is busy. These automatic options are
changed in programming.
For step-by-step instructions, see Change where a call goes
when there is no answer on page 37.
Changing Forward no answer
Forward no answer redirects unanswered calls to another
telephone on your Norstar system.
Tip - If the set is a member of a Hunt Group, the Call Forward
no answer feature is overridden and the Hunt Group call
continues to ring until the hunt time has expired. For more
information on Hunt Groups see Programming Hunt Groups on
page 157.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Forwarding your calls / 105
Line Redirection takes precedence over Forward no answer.
For instructions for changing Forward no answer refer to
Change where a call goes when there is no answer on page 37.
Changing the delay before a call is forwarded
You can assign the number of times that the incoming call
rings at your telephone before the call is forwarded. To
estimate the delay time in seconds, multiply the number of
rings by six.
For step-by-step instructions, see Change the number of times
the telephone rings before it is forwarded on page 37.
Forward on busy
Forward on busy redirects your calls to another telephone on
your Norstar system when you are busy on a call, or when you
have Do Not Disturb activated at your telephone. For step-bystep instructions, see Making changes to Call Forward No
Answer on page 36.
Line Redirection takes precedence over Forward on busy.
Calls that are redirected by Line Redirection are not affected
by any Call Forward features or Call Forward programming.
Telephones that have Forward on busy active can receive
priority calls. If you are busy on a target line call, another call
to that target line is redirected to the prime telephone for that
target line.
Tip - If the set is a member of a Hunt Group, the Call Forward
on busy feature is overridden and the Hunt Group call continues
to ring until the hunt time has expired. For more information on
Hunt Groups see Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
106 / Forwarding your calls
DND on Busy
When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in, your
telephone rings softly to alert you to the second call. If you
find this second ring distracting, you can have the system
prevent a second call from disturbing you by assigning Do Not
Disturb (DND) on Busy to your extension.
When DND on Busy is turned on for the set, internal and
private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing
when you are on the telephone. External callers are transferred
to the prime set used in your system. For step-by-step
instructions, see Making Changes to Do Not Disturb on Busy
on page 39.
If you use DND on Busy, the line indicator for an external
incoming call flashes, but your telephone does not ring.
Forward on busy takes priority over DND on Busy.
If an external call uses a target line, the call is processed
according to the programming of the target line. If the target
line is busy, the caller may hear a busy tone or be routed to the
prime set for the target line regardless of the DND on Busy
programming for the telephone.
Tip - If a set is a member of a Hunt Group and the set activates
this feature, the set does not receive notification of incoming
Hunt Group calls while on a call. The DND on busy feature
overrides the Hunt Group. For more information on Hunt
Groups see Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Forwarding your calls / 107
Call Forward and Voice Mail
If you want a voice mail system to pick up unanswered calls
automatically, do either of the following:
•
use the internal number of your voice mail as the
destination when you program Forward no Answer and
Forward on busy
•
make the ring delay greater than the delay used by your
voice mail system, if your voice messaging system or
service automatically retrieves calls
Displays
Forward denied
Forward>221
There are several reasons why you may get
this message. For instance, you cannot
forward your calls to a telephone that has
been forwarded to your telephone.
Your calls are being forwarded to telephone
CANCL 221.
Not in service
Two or more telephones are linked in a
forwarding chain, and one of them is out of
service or is being used for programming.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Line Redirection
Line Redirection allows you to send your external calls to a
telephone outside the office. You may choose to redirect all
your external lines or only some of them.
Line Redirection takes precedence over the Call Forward
feature. If both features are active on a set, incoming external
calls on redirected lines are routed to the specified Selective
Line Redirection (SLR) external destination. Incoming
internal calls are forwarded to the specified Call Forward
destination.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
108 / Forwarding your calls
You cannot use the Line Redirection feature on an M7100 or
a T7100 set, or on a telephone connected to an ATA.
Turning on Line Redirection
Follow these steps to turn on Line Redirection on your set:
1. Press ≤°›.
2. Select the outgoing line to be used for redirected calls.
3. Enter the number to which calls are redirected.
Refer to the list below for suggestions.
4. Select the lines to be redirected.
In step 3, you can enter the telephone number to which you
want to redirect calls, using one of the following methods:
•
Press an external autodial button.
•
Enter an external telephone number (using no more than
24 digits) then press ≥ or OK.
•
Press ≥ or OK if the line you have chosen as the
outgoing line is a private network line that does not require
you to dial digits.
If you use ALL to redirect all your lines, it is important that you
wait until all the lines on your telephone light up before
pressing ≥ or OK. If you press ≥ or OK before all the lines
light up, those lines not lit are not redirected.
Tip - The line chosen for redirecting calls on other lines can be
used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call. To avoid
redirection failing because the chosen line is in use, choose a
line pool with several lines in it.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Forwarding your calls / 109
Tip - The system does not check that the number you give for
line redirection is a valid one. If you redirect to an invalid
number, redirection fails. Using an autodial button to enter the
redirection number helps avoid this possibility. An autodial
button used for line redirection must be programmed to use a
specific line.
Canceling Line Redirection
When you are ready to resume service, use this procedure to
cancel line redirection.
1. Press ≤£°›.
2. Select the lines you no longer want to be redirected.
Allowing a telephone to redirect calls
You can use programming to determine if a set can use the
redirect calls feature and turn it on or off.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press “ four times. The display reads
Allow redirect:.
6. Press CHANGE to select Y (Yes) or N (No).
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
110 / Forwarding your calls
Turning the redirect ring for a telephone on or off
You can program a telephone to ring briefly (200
milliseconds) when a call is redirected to one of the lines
assigned to it.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press “ three times. The display reads
Redirect ring:.
6. Press CHANGE to select Y (Yes) or N (No).
Tip - If a telephone has redirect ring enabled, it rings briefly
for redirected calls on one of its lines even if another telephone
set up the line redirection.
Displays while redirecting lines
Intercom
You selected the intercom button as the
facility to place the call on. Enter a line pool
code or a destination code.
Press • or ADD to begin redirection. Press
Line Redirection
QUIT
ADD REMOVE £ or REMOVE to cancel a previous
redirection.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Forwarding your calls / 111
No line to use
You have one external line on your set, but
you need a second line to perform line
redirection. Redirect your external line using
a line pool as the outgoing line.
Outgoing line
You are attempting to redirect a line and the
line you have chosen is the outgoing line you
have selected as a destination. You cannot
redirect a line to itself. Select another line.
Pool code: ___
QUIT
Enter a valid line pool access code.
Redir by 221
OVERRIDE
You have attempted to redirect a line, but
someone else has already redirected that
line. Press • or OVERRIDE to override the
previous redirection and redirect the line as
you want.
Redirect denied
You can redirect calls only on individual
lines.
Select line out
QUIT
Select the line that is used to redirect calls
out of the system.
Select line(s)
QUIT
ALL
Press the lines to be redirected. To undo a
line selection, press it again.
Press ALL to redirect all your lines.
Select line(s)
ALL
Unequipped line
OK
Continue to press the lines to be redirected.
Press ≥ or OK when you are finished.
The line you are attempting to redirect
cannot be redirected because the hardware
does not support redirection.
Displays while canceling redirection
Select line(s)
QUIT
ALL
P0992640 02
Press the lines that are no longer to be
redirected. The lines light up as you press
them. Once you cancel redirection for a line
you cannot restore it by pressing the line
again. Press ALL to cancel redirection for all
your lines. When you are finished, press ≥
or OK.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
112 / Forwarding your calls
Select line(s)
ALL
OK
Continue to press the lines that are no longer
to be redirected. Press ≥ or OK when you
are finished.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
How Line Redirection is different from Call Forward
Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular
telephone to another telephone within the Norstar system. Line
Redirection redirects only the lines you specify, no matter
which telephones they appear on, to a telephone outside the
Norstar system. Line Redirection takes precedence over Call
Forward.
Using Line Redirection
You redirect lines at a telephone, but once redirected, the lines
are redirected for the entire system.
You can redirect only lines that appear at line buttons on your
telephone.
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the
middle of programming Line Redirection, but none of the
Norstar call handling features are available until the feature
times out. If you need to use a Norstar feature to process the
call, quit Line Redirection programming by pressing ≤. Do
not press ® or you disconnect the call you are trying to
process.
While you are programming Line Redirection you do not
receive any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your
telephone.
Be careful to avoid redirection loops. If for example, you
redirect your lines to your branch office and your branch office
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Forwarding your calls / 113
redirects its lines to you, you can create a redirection loop. If
these calls are long distance, you end up paying charges.
In certain situations, callers may experience lower volume
levels when you redirect calls to an external location.
Centralized voice mail and auto attendant
How centralized voice mail and auto attendant systems are
accessed, depends on which node users are attached.
Using a centralized voice mail system
If your system is part of a network that uses just one Meridian
voice mail or Norstar voice mail system, how the users access
the system will depend on which node they reside.
Users with telephones attached to the same system as the voice
mail system use the internal prompts (F981) to access
messages.
Users with telephones attached to any other nodes, will be
prompted to enter a mailbox number, then a password and the
# key at the end of the sequence. The subsequent voice
prompts will be the same ones that the users encounter when
they dial into a system from a remote site.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Communicating in the office
Paging
Paging allows you to make announcements over the Norstar
system using the telephone speakers, or your loudspeaker
system, if one is available.
Making a page announcement
1. Press ≤fl‚.
2. Choose a page type. Page types are:
⁄ through the telephone speakers (internal page)
¤ through an external speaker (external page)
‹ both internal and external (combined page)
3. If necessary, choose a zone.
4. Make your announcement.
5. Press ®.
Tip - Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the
page type, you can enter the following shortcut codes.
Page zone 0 is all zones.
Internal
≤fl⁄ and zone (0 to 6)
External
≤fl¤ (code 2 has no zones)
Combined
≤fl‹ and zone (0 to 6)
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Communicating in the office / 115
Activating and deactivating the ability to page
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ seven times. The display reads Paging.
6. Press CHANGE to select the setting: Y (Yes) or N (No).
Creating page zones
Each telephone can be assigned to one of six zones for
receiving pages.
Tip - Hunt Group DNs cannot be included in a page zone. For
more information on Hunt Groups see Programming Hunt
Groups on page 157.
You need the programming template. See Getting started with
Norstar on page 13 for more information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
116 / Communicating in the office
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ six times. The display reads Page Zone.
6. Press CHANGE to select the setting: 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6 or None.
You can make a telephone part of a page zone only if the
telephone has paging set to Y (Yes).
A zone is any set of Norstar telephones that you want to group
together for paging, regardless of their location. The
maximum number of sets in a page zone is 50.
Your installer programs whether a tone sounds before a page
begins, and the maximum number of seconds a page can last
before it is automatically turned off.
Tip - Make sure that everyone who needs to make page
announcements has a list showing which telephones are in
which page zones. Enter this information into your Modular ICS
6.0 Programming Record.
Displays
Enter the desired page zone number (0- 6) or
Enter zone:___
ALL press ALL.
You have entered a page zone code that is
not between 0 and 6.
Invalid zone
Page choice:
SETS
SPKR
BOTH
Select the type of page you want. See the list
in Making a page announcement on page
114.
Page timeout
The time allotted for paging has expired.
Paging ALL
You are making a page. The display shows
the page zone you have chosen. Press ≤
or ® when you are finished.
Paging busy
A page is already being made in the page
zone you have requested.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Communicating in the office / 117
Tip - You can make an announcement to one person by
placing a voice call to their telephone.
Using Page with external paging equipment
When you make a page that uses external paging equipment —
external page or combined page — the Long Tones feature is
automatically activated for the external paging system only.
This allows you to control optional equipment with the Long
Tones feature.
Sending messages
The Messages feature allows you to leave a message on the
display of another digital set or to analog telephones connected
to an Analog Station Module (ASM). The Messages feature
indicates if you have any messages waiting.
The Messages feature uses a message waiting list to keep a
record of your internal messages and your external voice mail
messages if you subscribe to a voice message service with
visual message waiting indication.
Sending a message
You can leave a message on the display of another telephone
in your Norstar system.
You can send up to four messages to different telephones,
including your voice message center. If your telephone is a
direct-dial telephone or a central answering position (CAP),
you can send up to 30 messages.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
118 / Communicating in the office
Only the designated direct-dial telephone for an analog
telephone connected to an Analog Station Module (ASM) can
send messages to analog telephones by pressing ≤⁄.
Depending on the programming setup, the analog telephone
provides either a Stuttered Dial Tone or a Message Waiting
Lamp to inform the user of messages pending.
If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at
another telephone using the Call Pickup feature, the message
remains on your telephone until you cancel it or successfully
contact the telephone that sent the message.
For analog telephones connected to an ASM, the message
waiting indicator remains on until the user invokes
˚£flfi. If the analog telephone has the Message
Reply Enhancement feature set to Yes, the message waiting
indicator is turned off automatically after the reply call is
answered no matter from where the call is answered.
For more information on the Message Reply Enhancement
feature, see the Norstar Modular ICS 6.0 Installer Guide.
1. Press ≤⁄.
2. On a telephone with a two-line display, press ADD.
Note: This step is not necessary on a telephone with a oneline display.
3. Enter the internal number of the person to whom you want
to send the message. The person’s display reads
Message for you.
4. On analog telephones connected to an Analog Station
Module (ASM), the message waiting indicator is activated.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Communicating in the office / 119
Canceling a message you have sent
1. Press ≤£⁄. The display reads Cancel for:.
2. Enter the internal number of the person to whom you sent
the message.
Viewing your messages
You can receive up to four messages from different
telephones, including your voice message center. A single
message from your voice message center may pertain to
several voice messages.
On a telephone with a one-line display
1. Press ≤flfi. The display shows the first message.
2. Press • or £ to move through your messages.
On a telephone with a two-line display
1. Press MSG. The display shows your first message.
2. Press NEXT to move through your messages.
Replying to a message
You can call the person who sent a message or your voice
message center while you are viewing the message.
On a telephone with a one-line display
Press ‚.
On a telephone with a two-line display
Press CALL.
If you want to call your voice message center using a line other
than the programmed line, exit your message list and dial the
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
120 / Communicating in the office
voice message center telephone number using normal dialing
methods.
Replying to a message using an analog telephone connected
to an ASM
On an analog telephone connected to an Analog Station
Module
Press ˚•flfi. The system automatically
retrieves and connects the user to the oldest message
sender. (The message can originate from either the
designated direct-dial telephone or the internal voice mail
system.)
If the analog telephone has the Message Reply Enhancement
feature set to Yes, and the sender is the designated direct-dial
telephone, the message waiting indicator is turned off
automatically after the reply call is answered, no matter from
where the call is answered.
For analog telephones connected to an ASM, using the
Message Waiting Reply feature (˚•flfi),
retrieves only internal messages sent to the user.
Analog telephones connected to an ASM cannot retrieve
external messages by using the Message Waiting Reply
feature (˚•flfi). For external messages, users
must call back the external voice mail center to retrieve their
messages. When doing so, the message waiting indicator on
the analog telephone is turned off automatically.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Communicating in the office / 121
Tip - If there is no voice mail system installed, only the
designated direct-dial telephone can send messages to an
analog telephone connected to an Analog Station Module
(ASM) using ≤⁄. The analog telephone can in turn
invoke a single digit access code to reach the designated
direct-dial telephone and retrieve messages.
If the designated direct-dial telephone of an analog telephone
connected to an Analog Station Module (ASM) is changed,
messages sent by the previous designated direct-dial
telephone are kept in the incoming message list of the analog
telephone until they are retrieved.
Removing items from your message list
You can erase a message while you are viewing it in your
message list. If the message is from your voice message center,
this only erases the message notification at your telephone.
You need to erase the voice message at your voice message
center. Refer to your voice message center documentation.
On a telephone with a one-line display
Press ≥.
On a telephone with a two-line display
Press ERASE.
Removing items from your message list using an analog
telephone connected to an ASM
To remove both internal and external messages on an analog
telephone connected to an Analog Station Module
Press ˚£flfi to invoke the Cancel Message
Waiting feature.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
122 / Communicating in the office
On analog telephones connected to an ASM, the Cancel
Message Waiting feature cancels the oldest message received.
The system no longer provides either a Stuttered Dial Tone or
a Message Waiting Lamp if there are no messages pending.
Viewing messages you have sent
On a telephone with a two-line display, you can view the
messages you have sent.
1. Press ≤⁄.
2. Press SHOW to display your first sent message.
3. Press NEXT to move through your sent messages.
Displays
Cancel denied
You have entered an invalid number when
attempting to cancel a message.
Cleared>LINENAM
NEXT
You have cleared an external message
from your message waiting list. The
message itself exists in your voice
message center until you erase it there.
In use: 221
You are trying to call from your message
waiting list. The line that you are trying to
use is being used by the identified Norstar
user.
L001:LINENAMVMsg
NEXT
CALL
CLEAR
You are viewing your message list. The
display shows the number and name of the
line that was used for your voice mail
message.
Message denied
You have tried to send a message to an
invalid internal number or to a telephone
that is out of service.
Message list
SHOW
ADD
EXIT
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
SHOW appears only if you have
outstanding messages. Press SHOW to
review messages you have sent. Press ADD
to send a new message.
P0992640 02
Communicating in the office / 123
Message to:
Enter the internal number of the telephone
to which you want to send a message.
Messages & Calls
MSG
CALLS
You have one or more messages and one
or more new Call Logs. Press ≤°‚fl
to change the first line of the display to the
current time and date.
No button free
You have no line button free with which to
reply to a message.
No number stored
There has been no number programmed
for the voice message center. Contact your
voice messaging service provider.
Start of list
NEXT
You are at the beginning of your list of
messages. Press NEXT to move through
your messages.
Their list full
You are trying to send a message to a user
whose message waiting list is full.
Your list full
You have tried to send a message but list
of sent messages on your set is full. Cancel
one of the messages you have sent, if
possible, or wait until you have received a
reply to one of those messages.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Using Voice Call
≤flfl
Use this feature to make an announcement or begin a
conversation through the speaker of another telephone in the
system.
Tip - Hunt Groups cannot accept voice calls. Answer buttons
have no appearances for voice calls, and the set does not ring
for voice calls. For more information on Hunt Groups see
Programming Hunt Groups on page 157. For more information
on Answer buttons see Answer buttons on page 55.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
124 / Communicating in the office
Muting Voice Call tones
When a voice call begins at your telephone, you hear a beep
every 15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is on.
To stop it from beeping, pick up the receiver or press the key
marked Handsfree/Mute.
Answering a Voice Call with Handsfree
If Handsfree Answerback is assigned to your telephone, you
can respond to a voice call without touching the telephone.
Handsfree Answerback is not available to the M7100 or the
T7100 sets.
When someone makes a voice call to you, simply start talking.
Your telephone’s microphone picks up your voice.
Once you have answered a voice call, you can put it on hold,
transfer it, or otherwise treat it as a normal call.
Blocking Voice Calls using Voice Call Deny
≤°°
Use this feature to prevent voice calls to your set. The result is
that Voice calls ring like regular internal calls. Your other calls
proceed normally.
Canceling Voice Call Deny
Press ≤£°°.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Communicating in the office / 125
Displays
Dial voice call
Dial the internal number or press the
internal autodial button of the person to
whom you want to speak.
Microphone muted
Your handsfree microphone is muted.
Press the key marked Handsfree/mute
or pickup your receiver to respond to the
voice call.
No voice call
The telephone receiving the call cannot
accept voice calls for one of the following
reasons: it is active or ringing with
another call; Call Forward is turned on;
Do Not Disturb is turned on; Voice Call
Deny is turned on; it is not a Norstar
telephone.
Your call proceeds automatically as a
regular ringing call.
Voice call
P0992640 02
The line is open for you to speak.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Tracking your incoming calls
Using Call Log
Telephones can automatically log Call Display information for
calls on an external line. The line must appear on that
telephone but it does not have to be a ringing line.
If your system is equipped with the appropriate equipment and
you have subscribed to the call information feature supplied by
your service provider, you are able to capture information
about incoming callers in your call log. The same feature is
supplied by an ISDN service package that comes with calling
line identification (CLID).
Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls. For each
call the log can contain:
•
•
•
•
sequence number in the Call Log
name and number of the caller
indication if the call was long distance
indication if the call was answered, and identify who
answered it
• time and date of the call
• number of repeated calls from the same source
• name of the line that the call came in on
Call Log can help you to
•
•
•
•
P0992640 02
keep track of abandoned or unanswered calls
track patterns for your callers, for example, volume of calls
and geographical location of calls
record caller information quickly and accurately
build a personal telephone directory from log items
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Tracking your incoming calls / 127
The long distance indicator and the name and number of the
call may not be shown in the log. This information depends on
the Call Display services provided by your local telephone
company and the local telephone company of the caller.
To use the features on the following pages, your telephone
must be have spaces available in its Call log. Your installer or
customer service representative programs each telephone with
an appropriate number of spaces.
Call Log options
With this feature, you can select the type of calls to be stored
in your Call Log. Choose from four Autolog options: No one
answered, Unanswerd by me, Log all calls, No
autologging.
1. Press ≤•°›. The display shows the current
option.
2. Press £ or NEXT to change the option.
3. Press ≤ or OK to select the display option.
Logging a call manually
≤°⁄‹
If your calls are not automatically logged, you can manually
log call information when you are connected to an external
call. Storing information for your current call can be helpful in
many situations.
For example, you may want to
•
record caller information without using paper and pencil
•
record only selected calls of your choice, rather than
relying on the automatic Call Log
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
128 / Tracking your incoming calls
•
quickly record caller information before a caller hangs up
Enabling and disabling autobumping
Your log has a set number of items that it can hold. When it
becomes full, new calls cannot be logged. When your log is
full, Autobumping automatically deletes the oldest Call Log
item when a new call is logged.
Press ≤°⁄fi to enable autobumping.
Press ≤£°⁄fi to disable autobumping.
Viewing your Call Log
To view your log:
1. Press ≤°⁄¤. The display shows the number or
previously read items (old) and the number of new, unread
items (new) in the log.
2. Press • or OLD to view old items; press £ or NEW to
view new items.
3. Press ‚ or RESUME to display the last item you viewed,
the last time you viewed your Call Log.
Names and numbers for external callers are displayed only if
you have subscribed to Call Display services from your local
telephone company.
Viewing a Call Log item
Press √ or MORE to view the information for a call
log item.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Tracking your incoming calls / 129
Erasing log items
You should routinely erase log items to make space for new
items in your log.
1. Display the item you want to erase.
2. Press ≥ or ERASE.
3. Press ® to exit.
If you accidentally erase an item, you can retrieve it.
1. Press ≥ or UNDO immediately after accidentally erasing
an item.
2. Press ® to exit.
Making a call using Call Log
You may find it helpful to place calls from within your Call
Log. The number stored for each call may vary depending on
the type of call. For example, if the call was placed from a
Centrex or PBX system, the first few numbers may need to be
trimmed before you can make the call. If the number you want
to call is long distance, or if you want to use a line pool, you
may need to add numbers.
To place a call:
1. Display the log item for the call you want to place.
2. Display the associated telephone number.
3. Press √ or TRIM, once for every digit that you
want to remove.
4. Dial any extra digits required.
5. Press an external line or line pool button.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
130 / Tracking your incoming calls
6. Lift the receiver. (This is not necessary if Handsfree is
programmed at your telephone.) The displayed number is
dialed.
Creating a password to your Call Log
To access your Call Log through a password:
1. Press ≤•°fi. The displays reads New passwrd:.
2. Enter your four-digit password. The display reads
Repeat New:.
3. Re-enter your four-digit password. The display reads
Password changed, which confirms that your password
has been assigned.
To enter Call Log using your password:
1. Press ≤°⁄¤ to enter Call Log. If you have
programmed a password, the display reads Password:.
2. Enter your four-digit password.
If you forget your Call Log password, it can be deleted in
programming. See Using passwords on page 211.
Changing your Call Log password
Use this procedure when you want to change the Call Log
password for your set.
1. Press ≤•°fi. The display reads Old passwrd:.
2. Enter your old password. The display reads
New passwrd:.
3. Enter your new four-digit password. The display reads
Repeat New:.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Tracking your incoming calls / 131
4. Re-enter your password. The display reads
Password changed, which confirms that your password
has been changed.
Deleting an assigned password
Use this procedure when you want to delete an assigned
password.
1. Press ≤•°fi. The display reads Old passwrd:.
2. Enter your old password. The display reads
New passwrd:.
3. Press ≥ or OK. The display reads No pswd assigned,
which confirms that your password has been deleted.
Programming a telephone to log calls automatically
Your installer or customer service representative can program
each telephone to automatically log calls coming in on a line.
Displays
1:Unknown name
The caller's name is unavailable.
1:Unknown number
The caller’s number is unavailable.
12:KATE SMITH
NEXT
ERASE
_ indicates a new item.
MORE
12¯KATE SMITH
NEXT
ERASE
MORE
12§KATE SMITH
NEXT
ERASE
MORE
P0992640 02
¯ indicates that the call was answered.
§ indicates a long distance call.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
132 / Tracking your incoming calls
49/1234567890123
NEXT
ERASE
MORE
/ indicates that the stored number has
been shortened to its final 11 digits. Press
√ or MORE to display additional
information about the call.
Call(s) bumped
One or more log entries have been deleted
by the Autobumping feature while you are
looking at the Call Log.
Hold or release
Hold or release your active call before
entering Call Log.
In use: SETNAME
The external line is in use.
Jan 4 9:00a
NEXT
ERASE
3X
MORE
The repeat call counter, shown along with
time and date, indicates the number of calls
you received from the same caller.
Line001
NEXT
ERASE
¯227
This call was answered at another
telephone (227).
MORE
¯Logit
Line001
NEXT
ERASE
MORE
This call was logged manually.
Line001
NEXT
ERASE
This call was not answered.
MORE
Messages & Calls
MSG
CALLS
There are one or more items in your
message waiting list, and there are one or
more new items in your Call Log. Press
≤°‚fl to change the first line of the
display to the current time and date.
New calls begin
You have viewed your last old log item and
now view your new log items.
No info to log
No information is available for the call.
No log assigned
No log space has been assigned to the
telephone.
No resume item
The resume item has been removed
because of Autobumping, repeat call
update, or log reallocation while you are
looking at the Call Log.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Tracking your incoming calls / 133
Using external Voice mail
If you subscribe to a voice message service outside your
office, you can access that service through your Norstar
system. Your installer or customer service representative
programs your Norstar telephone to indicate when you have a
voice message waiting on a particular line.
To find out if your external voice message service works with
Norstar, or if you have any problems with your service, contact
your voice message service provider.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Customizing your telephone
Finding out what a button does using Button Inquiry
≤•‚
You can use this feature to check the function of any line,
intercom, or programmed button on your telephone.
On the M7100 and the T7100 sets, Button Inquiry shows your
internal number followed by the function assigned to your
single memory button.
Displays
001
<LINENAME>
SHOW
OK
123456789012345...
VIEW‚
Press a button
EXIT
Press £ or press VIEW‚ or ·VIEW to
view a number that is too long to fit on the
display. Press ≥ or OK when you are
done.
The display shows the directory number of
the telephone, and the assigned name.
Press NEXT to see the first line assigned
to ring at the intercom button.
221 <SETNAME>
NEXT VIEW‚
<Feature name>
SHOW
The display shows the number and name
of the line. Press SHOW to view the
redirection status of the line.
OK
The name of the feature assigned to a
button is displayed when you press the
button. Press £ or SHOW for additional
information.
Press the button you want to check. Press
≤ or EXIT when you are finished.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Customizing your telephone / 135
Changing the set display contrast
Use this feature to adjust the contrast on your set.
1. Press ≤•‡.
2. Press a number on the dialpad to choose the contrast level
you prefer.
On a two-line telephone, you can use the UP and DOWN display
buttons to adjust the contrast. The number of contrast levels
available varies from one telephone model to another.
Changing the language on the display
You can select the language used on the display of each set.
The languages supported depends on which Profile was
installed on your system at Startup.
English is the default first language.
Refer to the Modular ICS 6.0 Installer Guide for a list of
languages supported by each profile. Check the programming
guide to determine which Profile was assigned to your system.
You can program ≤•fi‚⁄, the first language code,
on to a memory button. If you want subsequent languages to
display, you can keep pressing the button until the language
code you want appears on the display.
You cannot program ≤•fi‚¤ or ≤•fi‚‹
onto a memory button.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
136 / Customizing your telephone
Programming a feature code onto a memory button
You can program a feature code onto a memory button. In
some cases, pressing the button a second time cancels the
feature.
Programming feature buttons
Any memory button not programmed as an external or internal
line, target line, Answer button, or Handsfree/Mute button, is
available for features.
1. Press ≤•‹.
2. Press the memory button you want to program with a
feature.
3. Enter the appropriate feature code you want to assign onto
the button.
The following feature codes cannot be programmed onto a
memory button: Long Tones and any code beginning with •
except ≤•fi‚⁄ (Language Choice) and ≤•‡
(Contrast Adjustment).
Tip - When you program a button with the line pool feature
code, you must enter a line pool access code after the feature
code. The programmed line pool button accesses a specific line
pool, not the line pool feature.
Erasing a feature button
1. Press ≤•⁄.
2. Press the feature button.
3. Press ≥ or OK to erase the button.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Customizing your telephone / 137
Displays
<Feature name>
SHOW
The name of the feature assigned to a button
OK is displayed when you press the button.
SHOW appears when there is more
information available. Press £ or SHOW for
additional information.
Enter code:
If you are checking a speed dial button, enter
the three-digit speed dial code that you want
to check.
F__
QUIT
Enter the feature code, or press ® or QUIT
to quit programming or CLEAR to clear the
numbers you have entered. The system
accepts the entry as soon as you enter a
valid feature code.
CLEAR
Feature code:
QUIT
Press ≤ and enter the feature code you
want to assign to the button. You cannot
enter invalid codes.
Feature moved
You have programmed a button with a
feature that was already programmed onto
another button. The feature has moved to the
button you just programmed. Its original
button is now blank.
Press a button
EXIT
Press the button you want to check. Press
≤ or EXIT when you are finished.
Program and HOLD
Enter the number you want to program and
press ≥. To erase the button, just press
≥.
Program and OK
QUIT
OK
Enter the number you want to program and
press OK. To erase the button, just press ≥
or OK.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
138 / Customizing your telephone
Labeling your set
The Business Series Terminals have label strips that come
with each set. You can print the label for each button on your
set and install the strip beside the buttons. The Norstar Mseries sets have individual keycap labels. This section suggests
the process for setting up the labelling for your set.
Applying button labelling
Before you apply button labels, use the Button Inquiry feature
(≤•‚) to verify the button functions, and to avoid
activating features as you put the labels onto the buttons. For
more information refer to Finding out what a button does
using Button Inquiry on page 134.
Business Series Terminals
The T-series telephones are labelled beside the buttons. You
can use the Desktop Assistant utility to make changes and print
a new label card. Your system administrator can access this
application from the system CD or it can be downloaded from
http://www.nortelnetworks.com (Choose: Customer
Support/Software Distribution, under Product Selection
choose Desktop Assistant).
Business Series Terminal T7316 button label locations
Button
labels
T7316
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Customizing your telephone / 139
Norstar button caps
The Norstar M-series sets have two types of button caps:
•
Unlabeled, clear button caps with appropriate green or
grey paper for line numbers, telephone numbers, and
features
•
Pre-printed, colored button caps in green or grey
Some examples of pre-printed button caps
Green caps
Grey caps
∫Line 1
µ
©
ß
Tips - To make identification of line types easier, use
preprinted green button caps for lines that support incoming
and outgoing calls. Use clear button caps for target lines that
are incoming only.
Default button assignments
During Startup, the Norstar installer chooses one of the
available templates. Default features are assigned
automatically to the programmable buttons on installed sets.
These defaults vary depending on the template you choose,
and the style of telephone.
The default features are listed mapped out below.
Tips - Norstar M-series telephones are shipped from the
factory with the button caps in place for the Square template.
Please consult your customer service representative to
determine the type of template programmed into your system
before applying button assignments.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
140 / Customizing your telephone
T7316 Business Series Terminal button defaults
The default button assignments for the T7316 Business Series
Terminal (BST) depend on the template applied. The
exception is the default numbering for the dual memory
buttons. Refer to Using Buttons on page 16.
Refer to the Programming Record to identify the current
button programming for each set or group of sets.
Upper level buttons
Note the button numbering for the upper buttons of this set.
They are mapped to the equivalent from the M7310 Norstar
set. However, since there is no second level to the memory
buttons on this set, the button numbers are not consecutive.
These examples show defaults for a system with three-digit
internal numbers. The defaults do not actually exist on any
telephone, as no telephone has an autodial button for itself.
The position that would be taken by the autodial button for
itself is blank.
T7316 BST upper buttons
Button 23 ∫Set 227
Button 25 ∫Set 228
Button 27 ∫Set 229
Button 29 ∫Set 230
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Button 31 ∫Set 231
Button 33 ∫Set 232
Button 24 ∫Set 239
Button 26 ∫Set 240
P0992640 02
Customizing your telephone / 141
T7316 BST lower button assignments
The lower set of buttons on the T7316 are mapped in the
following way:
T7316 BST lower buttons
Button #/
Function
Square template
Button #/
Function
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
01 ∫Line 1
02 ∫Line 2
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
PBX template
Centrex template
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
01 ∂
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
01 ∫Line<xx>
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 ˚
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
142 / Customizing your telephone
Hybrid template
DID template
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
01 ∫Line 1
02 ø
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
01 ∫Line<xx>
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
M7310 telephone button defaults
The default button assignments for the M7310 telephone
depend on the template applied. The exception is the default
numbering for the dual memory buttons. Refer to Using
Buttons on page 16.
M7310 dual memory buttons
*12 ∫Set
*20∫Set
*28∫Set
11 ∫Set
233
221
*14∫Set 234
13 ∫Set 222
*16∫Set 235
15 ∫Set 223
*18∫Set 236
17 ∫Set 224
19 ∫Set
237
225
*22∫Set 238
21 ∫Set 226
*24∫Set 239
23 ∫Set 227
*26∫Set 240
25 ∫Set 228
27
241
∫Set 229
*30∫Set 242
29 ∫Set 230
*32∫Set 243
31 ∫Set 231
*34∫Set 244
33 ∫Set 232
Note: This example
shows defaults for a
system with three-digit
internal numbers. The
defaults do not actually
exist on any telephone,
as no telephone has an
autodial button for itself.
The position that would
be taken by the autodial
button for itself, is blank.
* These settings are
produced using the shift
key, located beside the
upper set of buttons.
Shift key
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Customizing your telephone / 143
M7310 lower button assignments
The following tables map the positions for the lower set of
buttons for the Norstar M7310 set.
Button #/
Function
Square template
Button #/
Function
01 ∫Line
1
02 ∫Line 2
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
PBX template
01 ∂
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
Centrex template
01 ∫Line<xx>
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 ˚
P0992640 02
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
Hybrid template
01 ∫Line 1
02 ø
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
DID template
01 ∫Line<xx>
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
06
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
144 / Customizing your telephone
M7324 telephone button defaults
The default button assignments for the M7324 telephone
depend on the template applied during startup. Refer to Using
Buttons on page 16.
Square template
# Function
# Function
01 ∫Line 1
02 ∫Line 2
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ∫Saved No.
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
PBX template
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ∫Saved No.
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Hybrid template
01 ∫Line 1
02 ø
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ∫Saved No.
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
P0992640 02
Customizing your telephone / 145
Centrex template
01 ∫Line<xx>
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
DID template
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ˚
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
∫Line<xx>
†
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ∫Saved No.
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
M7208 and T7208 button defaults
The default button assignments for the M7208 and the T7208
sets are the same, depending on which template was applied.
M7208 button set
Square template
T7208 button set
01 ∫Line 1
02 ∫Line 2
03 µ
04 π
05 ç
06 ß
07 ∆
08 ∆
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
146 / Customizing your telephone
Centrex template
Hybrid template
PBX template
DID template
01 ∫Line<xx>
01 ∫Line 1
02 †
02 ø 02 † 02 †
03 µ
03 µ 03 µ 03 µ
04 ˚
04 π 04 π 04 π
05 ç
05 ç 05 ç 05 ç
06 ß
06 ß 06 ß 06 ß
07 ∆
07 ∆ 07 ∆ 07 ∆
08 ∆
08 ∆ 08 ∆ 08 ∆
01 œ 01 ∫Line<xx>
Tips - The default Page button activates the External Page
option (≤fl¤).
M7100 and T7100 button defaults
For all templates, the one programmable button on the M7100
and the T7100 sets is µ.
Rules of default button assignment
Line and Intercom buttons are assigned by default templates
and can be changed in programming. Handsfree/Mute and
answer buttons are not assigned by default. If these features
are defined, however, they are automatically assigned to
specific buttons, as described on this and the following page.
None of these buttons can be assigned to M7100 or T7100 sets,
as these sets have only one program button.
The Handsfree/Mute feature appears on the bottom right-hand
button or the M7310 set and the bottom button on the M7208
telephone, moving the Intercom button(s) up one position. On
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Customizing your telephone / 147
the Business Series Terminals, this feature has two buttons,
which are located under the numeric dialpad, beneath the
volume rocker button.
Each set can have up to eight Intercom buttons. On the M7310,
M7324 telephones, these buttons assign to the position above
the Handsfree/Mute button at the bottom right-hand position
on your telephone. On the T7316 set, these buttons assign to
the buttons on the bottom right set of buttons, starting from the
bottom button.
On the M7208 and T7208 sets, these buttons assign above the
bottom button.
Each telephone can have up to four answer buttons. On the
M7310 set, they appear above Intercom buttons in the right
column and continue up from the bottom in the left column,
replacing the features on those buttons. On the M7208 and
T7208 sets, answer buttons appear above the Intercom buttons
and below external line buttons in a single column.
External line buttons appear in ascending line order, starting at
the top button in the left column of the M7310 Norstar set
They also start from the top button on the M7208 and T7208
sets. If more than five external lines are assigned to an M7310
telephone, or more than 12 to an M7324 telephone, assignment
continues down the buttons on the right column, erasing the
features on those buttons. Line buttons have priority over
feature access buttons but not Handsfree/Mute, Intercom, or
answer buttons.
Moving line buttons
You can move external lines to different buttons on your
telephone to arrange your lines in the way that makes the most
sense to you.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
148 / Customizing your telephone
You cannot move intercom, answer or Handsfree/Mute
buttons onto a CAP module.
1. Press ≤•°⁄.
2. Press the button you want to move the line from.
3. Press the button you want to move the line to.
Displays
Exchanged
The two buttons you selected have
exchanged position.
Invalid location
You have tried to move a line to a button
that cannot be used as a line button, such
as an intercom button, Handsfree/Mute
button, or an answer button.
Move line from:
QUIT
Press the button of the line you want to
move. Press ≤ or QUIT when you have
finished moving lines.
Move line to:
QUIT
Press the button you want to move the line
to. Neither of the buttons is erased. The
lines, or the line and feature, simply switch
places.
Press a line
The button you are trying to move is not a
line button. If you are trying to switch a line
and a feature, move the line to the feature
button and not the feature button to the
line.
Changing the type of ring
You can choose one of four distinctive rings for your
telephone. This makes it easier to identify your telephone in an
open office.
1. Press ≤•fl.
2. Press ⁄, ¤, ‹, ›, or NEXT. You hear the selected
ring for two seconds.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Customizing your telephone / 149
3. Repeat until you hear the ring you prefer, then press ≥
or OK.
Adjusting the Ring volume
Use this feature to adjust the ring volume.
1. Press ≤•°‚. The telephone rings.
2. Press √ to adjust the volume; left end for lower
and right end for higher.
Hiding the message or calls indication
The display that shows you have messages or calls can be
replaced with the current time and date. You can retrieve your
message and call information by using the display buttons that
appear on the second line of the display.
If you are using a telephone with a single-line display, the
message or call indication is hidden.
1. Press ≤°‚fl. The current time and date appears on
the top line of the display.
2. Press MSG or ≤flfi to see your messages, or press
CALLS or ≤°⁄¤ to see your calls.
Restoring the messages and calls indication
Press ≤£°‚fl.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
150 / Customizing your telephone
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
User Preferences
The User Preferences section of programming allows you to
program memory buttons, speed dial codes and other settings
for any Norstar telephone on the system.
For example, an employee may want to have the Do Not
Disturb feature programmed onto a memory button or create a
speed dial code. Instead of programming from the each
specific set, you can go into programming on the telephone
nearest you to make the change.
Using User Preferences
1. Press ≤••Ë͉ (≤••°‡‹‡).
2. Enter your System Coordinator or Basic password (the
default passwords are ¤‹fl›fl and
¤¤‡›¤).
By using a Basic password, it is possible to have someone else
do day-to-day upkeep of the telephone programming without
giving out access to sensitive programming. See Using
passwords on page 211.
After you enter the proper password, the display shows you the
telephone with the lowest internal number followed by its
name (For example, 221:Reception).
1. Press ‘ to move through all the telephones on the
system.
2. Press ≠ when you see the telephone you want to
change. The display reads the model number of the
telephone at the extension.
The display shows Connect set if no telephone is
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
152 / User Preferences
connected at that internal number. You cannot make
changes if the model is Other.
3. Press ‘ to move through all the subheadings in
User Preferences.
User Preferences programming is available under the heading
User Prefernces in Terminals&Sets in the main body of
programming.
Sub-headings in User Preferences
User prefernces
Model
Button prgrming
User speed dial
Call log opt’ns
Dialing opt’ns
Language
Display cntrst
Ring type
Voice path
Changing button programming
Press ≠ at Button prgrming. The display shows the
number of buttons on the telephone. An example is shown in
Displays at the end of this section.
If the telephone has a CAP module, you can press CAP1 to see
the buttons on the module.
Press ‘ to move through all the buttons on the
telephone.Refer to Default button assignments on page 139 for
button number mapping for each type of Business Series
Terminal and Norstar series telephones.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
User Preferences / 153
Use the display buttons to change the programming for a
button.
Note: User Preferences programming cannot change the
buttons that are used by lines, intercom, and the handsfree
feature.
The display buttons used in button programming.
CANCL
Moves you out of a setting without making any changes to
it.
CLR
Erases the button.
TEL#
Programs the key as an autodial number for an internal or
an external number. If it is an external autodial number, you
must choose a line, line pool, or the routing table for the call
to use.
CHANGE
Used when you are setting up an external autodial number.
Press CHANGE until you see the type of line or pool you
want the number to use.
FEATR
Press to store a feature code on the button.
FIND
Locates a specific button on a telephone by entering its
number. Button numbers are shown in the illustrations.
LIST
Takes you to a list of feature codes. Press ‘ to
move through the list and press OK when you see the
feature you want to program on the button.
Changing User Speed Dial
1. Press ≠ at User Speed Dial. The display shows
the number of speed dial codes that are available.
2. Press ‘ to see the first speed dial code (256).
3. Press ‘ to move through all the speed dial codes.
4. Press ≠ to find the code you want to change.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
154 / User Preferences
5. Press CHANGE and enter the telephone number the same
way you would dial it on the telephone.
6. Press OK.
7. Press ‘ and choose the line (or enter a code for a
line pool) the speed dial code should use.
Use the line pool code to select a particular line pool for use
with Speed Dial. If you select Use routing tbl, a line or pool
is chosen by the routing programming according to the initial
digits in the number.
The route you choose for a User Speed Dial code must be one
that the telephone can use. For example, if the telephone does
not have access to Line Pool B and you use that pool code with
the speed dial code, the code does not work.
To change a system speed dial code, see Adding or changing
a system speed dial on page 31.
Changing Call Log options
1. Press ≠ at Call log opt’ns….
2. Press CHANGE until you see the option you want to use. See
Call Log options on page 127.
Changing how calls are dialed
1. Press ≠ at Dialing opt’ns….
2. Press CHANGE until you see the option you want to use.
Descriptions for dialing options are found on the Telephone
Feature Card, or see Changing how you dial your calls on
page 72.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
User Preferences / 155
Changing the language used on the display
Press CHANGE at Language: until you see the language you
want to use. See Changing the language on the display on page
135.
Making the display lighter or darker
Press CHANGE at Display cntrst until you see the value you
want to use.
The display contrast on the telephone you are using for the
programming session does not change when you are
programming another telephone.
Changing the ring type
At Ring type:, press CHANGE until you see the option you
want to use.
Descriptions for ringing options are found on the Telephone
Feature Card or in Changing the type of ring on page 148.
Displays
There are ten memory buttons and twelve
10+24 buttons
FIND dual memory buttons on the telephone you
are viewing. Press ‘ to begin
looking at what’s on each button.
B01:L06:Line
A line appears on the button. You cannot
001
FIND store a feature or number on it.
B02:#Reply Msg...
A feature is stored on this button. Press
CLR
TEL#
FEATR ≠ to see the feature code. A full list
of names and codes for features is included
in the index.
Code:F#65...
CLR
TEL#
P0992640 02
FEATR
Shows the feature code stored on a button.
Press ≠ to see the button number
and feature name.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
156 / User Preferences
B03:160455512...
CLR
TEL#
FEATR
The button has a telephone number stored
on it. Press ≠to see the rest of the
number.
The autodial is an external number. Press
Externl tel #...
CLR
TEL#
FEATR ≠ to see what line or pool the call is
programmed to go out on.
The autodial is an internal number. Press
Internl tel #...
CLR
TEL#
FEATR ≠ to see more information.
The button is used for intercom. Press
B04:Intercom...
FIND ≠ to see more information about the
button. You cannot store a feature or number
on it.
The button is used for an Answer DN. You
B05:Ansr 93
FIND cannot store a feature or number on it.
Either nothing is stored on the button or you
B06:Blank button
CLR
TEL#
FEATR have just cleared the button by pressing CLR.
The button is occupied by the Handsfree
B10:Handsfree
FIND feature. You cannot store a feature or
number on it.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Programming Hunt Groups
The Hunt Groups feature allows a group of Norstar sets to be
called by a single directory number ensuring that calls are
easily routed to the appropriate group.
The Incoming Line Group (ILG) functionality is now
accomplished through the Hunt Group feature.
When upgrading from a pre-Modular ICS 4.0 system
to a Modular ICS 6.0 system, any lines previously
belonging to an ILG are not automatically converted
to broadcast Hunt Groups. You must go in and
program them to the new feature. Please refer to
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group on page
161.
Hunt Groups are used in situations where a group of people
performing the same task are required to answer a number of
related phone queries. Some typical uses of Hunt Groups are:
•
a sales department answering questions on product prices
or availability
•
a support department answering questions concerning the
operation of a product
•
an emergency department answering calls for help.
Hunt Groups can be used to route calls to a support service
such as a Help Line for a software company. Specialists
dealing with Product A can be in one group, and specialists
dealing with Product B can be in another group. Incoming
calls hunt for the next available set in the group. If no set is
available, the call can be placed in a queue or routed to an
overflow set.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
158 / Programming Hunt Groups
The Hunt Groups subheading in system programming is the
area where programming changes are made to the following:
• members of a group
• member position in a group
• what lines are assigned to a group
• how incoming calls are distributed
• how long the system looks for available members
• where a call goes if all members are busy
Note: Videophones should not be programmed as members of
a Hunt Group. Hunt Groups allow one B channel
connection at a time and videophones use two B
channels.
Features affected by Hunt Groups include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward No Answer
Call Forward on Busy
Group Pickup
Transfer via Hold
Priority Call
Line Redirection
Page Zones
Voice Call
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 159
Adding or removing members from a group
Members of the group can be any Norstar or Business Series
Terminal set, ISDN terminal, or portables. A Norstar set can
be in more than one Hunt Group but is considered a member
in each Hunt Group, increasing the total number of members
in the system.
There can be only one appearance of the same Hunt Group on
a set. Hunt Group DNs cannot be members of other Hunt
Groups. A DN can be associated with a member of a Hunt
Group and is called a member DN.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
your Hunt Group number range.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on your
programming set.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:. (There
are no member DNs if none are programmed.)
9. Press ≠. The display shows the group members.
10. Press ADD to add a member or press REMOVE to remove a
member from the group.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
160 / Programming Hunt Groups
Moving members of a group
Member order within a Hunt Group is important. The member
order determines how a call is routed through a Hunt Group.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
9. Press ≠. The display shows the members for that
group.
10. Press MOVE to move an existing member to another place
within the Hunt Group. The display shows the member
number followed by an arrow.
11. Enter the new position number for the extension.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 161
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group
Configure the prime set for a Hunt Group line to None to avoid
delayed ring transfer of external Hunt Group calls to the prime
set before the Hunt Group can receive the call.
A line can be assigned to only one group.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Line assignment.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Show line:.
11. Enter the line number you want to program or press SCAN
to go to the first line assigned to this group, or press LIST
to go to the first line in the system.
12. Press CHANGE to program the line as Unassigned or
Assigned.
*HGnn* means the line is assigned to another Hunt Group.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
162 / Programming Hunt Groups
Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group
You can assign distinctive ring patterns to your Hunt Group so
that calls can be rated in priority for the group. These
distinctive ring patterns, have the same characteristics as for
line and extension distinctive ring patterns.
The Hunt Group distinctive ring pattern determines how a call
will ring within the Hunt Group. If members of the group have
ring patterns assigned to their telephones that are higher than
the ring patterns of the incoming line or the Hunt Group, then
the Hunt Group will use the ring of the corresponding member
telephones.
If the incoming call (line) has a higher ring pattern assigned,
than the Hunt Group, the Hunt Group will ring with the line
ring pattern.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys
on your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠ until the display shows Member extns:.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Dstnct
Ring:NONE.
8. Press CHANGE to toggle to the ring pattern number you
want to assign to the Hunt group line. (None, 2, 3, 4)
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 163
Setting the distribution mode
There are three modes of call distribution:
•
Broadcast—rings each set in the group simultaneously.
Calls are handled one at a time, while succeeding calls
calls are queued. As soon as a call is picked up, the call
next in the queue is presented immediately to the group.
In Broadcast mode, a single incoming call rings
simultaneously at all the sets in a group. This way, all
receptionists in the group can share the load of answering
large volumes of calls. All sets automatically display the
calling line identification (CLID), if available. A familiar
example is a fund-raising campaign where a group of
operators are waiting to take each call as it comes in.
•
Sequential—starts the call at the first set in the Hunt
Group. Distribution is complete when the first free set is
found. Simultaneous calls can be presented. Distribution is
order based.
In Sequential mode, you can program your top salesperson
to be the first member of the group to receive calls.
•
Rotary—the call starts at the set after the one which
answered the last call. Distribution is complete when the
next free set has been found. Simultaneous calls can be
presented. Distribution is order based.
In Rotary mode, you can ensure that all your helpline
people are receiving calls on an equal basis, rather than one
person receiving the majority of calls. The call rings at one
set at a time in a round robin fashion.
If a Hunt Group has available members but nobody answers
the call, the call is rerouted through the list until someone
answers the call. If all lines are busy, the call is routed
according to whatever has been set for the busy line setting.
Refer to ‘Programming busy line setting’ on page 165.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
164 / Programming Hunt Groups
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Mode.
10. Press CHANGE to set the mode: Sequential, Rotary,
Broadcast.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Setting the hunt delay
This setting allows you to program the number of rings the
system permits at a Hunt Group set before moving on to the
next set in the Hunt Group.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 165
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Hunt delay.
10. Press CHANGE to select the setting: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Programming busy line setting
A Hunt Group is considered busy if one of two scenarios
exists:
•
all of its members are being presented an incoming Hunt
Group call
•
all of its members are active on a Hunt Group call
There are three routing options if all members are busy:
•
BusyTone—the caller gets a busy tone (PRI lines only)
•
Overflow—the call is routed to an overflow position. If
the overflow DN is the hunt group DN for that same hunt
group, the overflow option will not appear.
•
Queue—the call stays in the system for a period of time.
Within this period of time, the call is presented to an
member if one becomes available. When the time-out
occurs, the call is presented to an overflow position.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
166 / Programming Hunt Groups
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows If busy:.
10. Press CHANGE to set the mode: BusyTone, Overflow,
Queue.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Programming the queue time-out
This setting allows you to program the number of seconds a
call remains in the Hunt Group queue before it is routed to the
overflow position.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 167
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Q Timeout:.
10. Press CHANGE to set the queue time-out: 15, 30, 45, 60,
120, 180.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Programming the overflow set
This setting allows you to program the overflow set to which
the Hunt Group calls are to be routed. Unless the overflow
position is a Hunt Group set, the call ceases to be a Hunt Group
call. If the overflow set is a Hunt Group set, the call is treated
as a new call and goes to the bottom of the queue.
The overflow set can be a set DN number associated with a
voice mailbox.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
168 / Programming Hunt Groups
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
9. Press ‘ until he display shows Overflow:.
10. Press CHANGE to change the overflow position.
11. Enter the new overflow position.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Setting the name
This setting allows you to program the Hunt Group name, such
as Service or Sales. The name can be up to seven characters in
length.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Name:.
10. Press CHANGE.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 169
11. Use the dialpad to enter the name of the Hunt Group.
12. Press ‘ to store the name.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Using Silent Monitor
When silent monitor is activated on your system, you can use
your SM supervisor two-line display telephone to monitor
Hunt groups calls based on which DN you select to monitor.
Refer to the Modular ICS Installation Guide for detailed
information about the fields that make up this feature.
To start a session, on a silent monitor supervisor telephone:
1. Enter ≤•fifi‚.
2. Type in the SM password (default: SILENT (745368))
3. Enter the DN of the telephone you want to monitor and
press OK.
If that telephone is currently on a Hunt group call, you will
be automatically connected to the call. If the telephone is
idle or not on a hunt group call, you will be prompted to
pick another DN to monitor.
Tips - Your telephone is muted by default at the
beginning of any monitoring session. Press the
Handsfree/Mute button or the display key under JOIN
to enter the conversation.
To end a session: Press ®, or press the display key under
OTHER or EXIT.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
170 / Programming Hunt Groups
While attempting to monitor a call, or during a call, you may
get one of the following prompts:
DN
RETRY
OK
OTHER JOIN
EXIT
If you make a mistake entering a DN
number, press RETRY and re-enter the
number. If the number you entered is
correct, press OK.
While a call is being monitored, you can
choose to:
• move to another Hunt group member
(OTHER)
• join the current conversation (JOIN)
• exit the silent monitoring (EXIT)
OTHER LEAVE EXIT
When you join a monitored call, you can
choose to:
• move to another Hunt group member
(OTHER)
• mute your telephone out of the
current conversation (this does not
disconnect silent monitoring) (JOIN)
• exit the silent monitoring (EXIT)
Access denied
You tried to start a monitoring session on
a telephone that does not support the
feature.
Needs Handsfree
You entered the silent monitor feature
code without picking up the handset, and
the telephone does not support Handsfree
operation.
Release calls
You entered the silent monitor feature
code on a telephone that already has an
active call. To continue, you will have to
put that call on hold, or release it.
Your number
OBSERVE
You entered your own DN. Press OBSERVE
to enter another hunt group telephone.
Invalid number
OBSERVE
The DN you entered is invalid for your
system. Press OBSERVE to enter another
hunt group telephone.
Not in Service
OBSERVE
The DN you entered did not respond to the
system. Press OBSERVE to enter another
hunt group telephone.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 171
Not HG member
OBSERVE
The DN you entered is not a Hunt Group
member. Press OBSERVE to enter another
hunt group telephone.
Supervisor
OBSERVE
The DN you entered belongs to another
Supervisor. You cannot monitor SM
supervisor telephones. Press OBSERVE to
enter another hunt group telephone.
Not Supported
OBSERVE
The DN you entered belongs to a portable
telephone or an ISDN terminal. Press
OBSERVE to enter another hunt group
telephone.
DN: Idle
The current call on the telephone you are
monitoring is either not a Hunt Group call,
or the call came in on a line key on that
telephone.
Note: You should not assign lines which
are assigned to the hunt group to
individual hunt group members
Feature notes
•
You can only monitor external hunt group calls.
•
You must release all calls on your supervisor telephone
before you attempt to run a monitoring session.
•
The DN you choose to monitor must be a designated
member of a hunt group.
•
The supervisor telephone can be part of a hunt group.
Supervisor telephones cannot be monitored.
•
If the hunt group call gets transferred, the session is
dropped because the call is no longer a hunt group call.
•
If any of the parties release the call, the monitoring session
is dropped, and the supervisor will be prompted to pick
another DN to monitor.
•
If the call is put on hold by any of the three parties, the
monitoring session is dropped, and the supervisor will be
prompted to pick another DN to monitor.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
172 / Programming Hunt Groups
•
To transfer a session to your handset when you start the
monitoring session in Handsfree mode, press the OTHER
key and re-enter the DN.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using the Hospitality features
This section describes the Hospitality Services feature which
is used to administer room and alarm services in small to
medium-sized facilities such as hostels, motels, or hospitals.
There are three types of sets that make up this type of system:
Common set—this telephone can be found in the lobby,
office, or common area, and is not associated with a room.
This type of set cannot access all of the features.
Room set—this telephone resides in a specific room and can
be used by both guests and cleaning staff to set alarms or
indicate room condition. Up to five sets can be assigned to the
same room number, such as for fax lines, internet dial-up, etc.
Administration set—this telephone must be a two-line
display set and is usually configured with a password to allow
secure administration of room occupancy and condition
services and alarm services.
Hospitality passwords
There are two passwords within the hospitality feature. One
provides secure access to the administration set, and one
provides secure access to a room condition setting from each
room set for housekeeping staff.
Desk pswd
Change this password frequently, to maintain security.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
174 / Using the Hospitality features
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. Press ≠.
6. Desk pswd:4677 displays.
7. Press CHANGE.
8. New pswd: displays
9. Enter a new password, then press OK.
Cond pswd
Change this password frequently, to maintain security.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
1. Press ≠.
2. Press ‘
3. Cond pswd:None displays.
4. Press CHANGE.
5. New pswd: displays
6. Enter a new password, then press OK.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using the Hospitality features / 175
Room/desk information
There are two aspects to programming room information.
•
First you must program specific DNs to a specific room
and set up the room occupancy filters, which determine
what types of calls can be made from a room set at various
states of occupancy.
Note: You can assign up to five DNs to the same room
number.
•
Then you need to administer the room occupancy and state
of the room.
Programming room information
Use this setting to assign set DNs to a specific room.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. At the Hospitality heading, press ≠ until Room/
desk info displays.
6. Press ≠. Show set: displays.
7. Enter a room set number or press LIST and press
‘ until you find the DN of the set you want to
assign to a room.
8. Press ≠. Room #:None displays.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
176 / Using the Hospitality features
9. Press CHANGE and enter the room number, then press OK to
accept the change.
10. Repeat step 6 for all the sets you want to assign.
11. Press ‘. Adm pwd req’d:Y displays
12. Press CHANGE and choose Y or N, depending on your
security requirements.
Call restrns
You can set up call restrictions based on room occupancy
states. This setting affects the Room occupancy feature.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. At the Hospitality heading, press ≠ until Call
restrns displays.
6. Press ≠. Vacant:00 displays.
7. Press CHANGE and enter the filter that defines the
restrictions for your hospitality system.
The Restriction Filters section in the Modular ICS 6.0
Installer Guide describes how to set up filters.
8. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other room occupancy states.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using the Hospitality features / 177
The table below shows an example of a call restrictions
setup.
Room
Occupancy
Filter
Description
Vacant
11
no calls allowed except 911
Basic
11
no calls allowed except 911 and internal
extensions
Mid
12
no calls allowed except 911, 1800, 188
and internal extensions
Full
13
no call restrictions
Service times
You can set the time when occupied rooms change from
Service done to Service required. This setting affects the
Room condition feature.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. At the Hospitality heading, press ≠ until
Service time displays.
6. Press ≠. Hour: 00 displays.
7. Press CHANGE and enter the hour (00 to 23).
If the number is less than 13, the display shows AM. Press
CHANGE to select PM, if required. Press OK to accept.
8. Press ≠. Minutes: 00 displays.
9. Press CHANGE and enter the minutes (00 to 59).
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
178 / Using the Hospitality features
Using the room/set programming
This section describes how the room occupancy and room
condition settings are used.
Setting dialing filters by room state
1. Press ≤°‡·.
2. Enter the Desk admin password if you are prompted for a
password.
The set displays: Oc of rm#::
3. Enter the room number and press OK.
The set displays rrrrr:Vacant.
4. Press the CHANGE display key and select the required status
for the room set.
5. To program other rooms, press the FIND or NEXT display
key and return to step 3.
6. Press ® to exit.
Note: Setting the room state to Vacant cancels any outstanding
alarms.
Setting the room condition
You can use this feature on a room set or administration set to:
•
set the room state to service done (Srvc done)
•
set the room state to Needs service (Needs srvc)
•
query the state of the room
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using the Hospitality features / 179
Using the room set:
1. Press ≤°‡fl on a digital set
or ˚•°‡fl on an analog set.
2. At the prompt, set the status of the room.
Note: You may be required to enter a Room condition
password.
Press ⁄ to indicate Set to srv done.
Press ¤ to indicate Set to needs srv.
The set displays the selected prompt.
3. Press ® to exit.
Using the admin set:
1. Press ≤°‡°.
2. Enter the Desk admin password if you are prompted for a
password.
The set displays: Cd of rm#:
3. Enter the room number and press OK.
The set displays rrrrr:Vacant.
4. To update the condition, press CHANGE and select the
required status.
To query the condition of other rooms, press the FIND or
NEXT displays keys.
5. Press ® to exit.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
180 / Using the Hospitality features
Programming the alarm feature
If you want to allow the room sets to program wake-up alarms,
there are a couple of program settings that need to be entered.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Sets.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. At the Hospitality heading, press ≠ until Alarm
displays.
6. Press ≠. Attn attempts:3 displays.
7. Press CHANGE until you find the number you want (1-5).
8. Press ‘. Retry intrvl:4 displays.
9. Press CHANGE until you find the number you want (2, 4, 6,
or 8).
10. Press ‘. Attn duration: 15 displays.
11. Press CHANGE until you find the number of seconds you
want (10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50).
12. Press ‘. Time format:12 hr displays.
13. Press CHANGE to choose either 12hr or 24hr.
14. Press ‘. Expired alarms displays.
15. Press ≠. Notify set:None displays.
16. Press CHANGE to enter a set DN to be notified.
17. Press ‘. Use tone: N displays.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using the Hospitality features / 181
18. Press CHANGE to choose either Y (yes) or N (no).
19. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Using the Administration set to control alarms
Only a Hospitality Services set can use this alarm
administration feature. This feature is also associated with a
room number, and cannot be used on common sets.
Use this feature to:
•
query a current or last alarm time set for a room
•
assign an alarm time for any room
•
change an alarm time for any room
•
cancel an pending alarm for any room
To program the alarm, follow these steps:
1. Press ≤°‡‡.
2. Enter the Desk admin password if you are prompted for a
password.
The set displays: al of rm#:
3. Enter the room number.
4. Press VIEW. The set displays Alrm: 07:00am OFF:.
If the alarm time is correct, press the ON/OFF display key.
If you want to change the time, enter a new four-digit
alarm time.
If the clock uses a 24-hour format, enter an hour between
00 and 23, and minutes between 00 and 59. The set
displays: Alarm ON hh:mm
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
182 / Using the Hospitality features
If the clock uses a 12-hour format, enter the time, then
when the set displays: hh:mm AM or PM?, press AM or PM.
The set displays: Alarm ON hh:mm.
5. Press ® to exit.
Using the alarm
To set an alarm on a digital telephone:
1. Press ≤°‡fi. The displays shows Alrm:07:00
OFF
2. Do one of the following:
If the alarm is correct, press ON/OFF.The set displays:
Alrm:07:00am ON. Press DONE to exit.
If you need to change the alarm time, press CHG. The set
displays: Enter time:
3. To enter a new time, do one of the following:
If the clock uses a 24-hour format, enter an hour between
00 and 23, and minutes between 00 and 59. The set
displays: Alarm ON hh:mm
If the clock uses a 12-hour format, enter the time, then
when the set displays: hh:mm AM or PM?, press AM or PM.
The set displays: Alarm ON hh:mm.
To set an alarm on an analog set:
1. Press ˚•°‡fi. A tone sounds.
2. Enter a four-digit alarm time:
If the clock uses a 24-hour format, enter an hour between
00 and 23, and minutes between 00 and 59. A tone sounds.
If the clock uses a 12-hour format, enter the time, then
press • to select am or £ to select pm. A tone sounds.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using the Hospitality features / 183
To enter a new time, repeat the above steps and enter a new
time. This overwrites the existing entry.
Canceling an alarm
Canceling the alarm time for any set cancels the alarm time for
all the sets in the same room.
Digital set: Press ≤£°‡fi.
Analog set: Press ˚£°‡fi.
Turning off an alarm
When the alarm rings, the user can release the ring by doing
one of the following, depending on the type of set in the room:
Digital set: Press any button except ≥.
Analog set: Lift and replace the handset.
≥ acts like a snooze alarm and will temporarily disable the
alarm for a programmed period. Refer to Service times on page
177.
If the user is on a call when the alarm sounds, they can press
any button except ®, which would release the call instead.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
184 / Using the Hospitality features
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Telephone features
Installing Business Series Terminals
If you are connecting a Business Series Terminal for the first
time, refer to the following illustrations as a guide.
Installing the Business Series Terminal connections
Installing to a desk jack
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
186 / Telephone features
Mounting a Business Series Terminal on the wall
Installing without the angled base
Mounting a Business Series Terminal using the stand
Tighten screws for a secure fit.
Mount the stand as shown and
insert screw. Use the screw that
came with your keystation.
Connect cords to the keystation,
refer to cord connections
Mount the keystation onto the
screws and slide it down.
Connect line cord to
wall jack.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Telephone features / 187
Installing Norstar telephones
If you are connecting a Norstar telephone for the first time,
refer to the following illustrations as a guide.
Installing a Norstar telephone
Connect to
jack wired from
distribution block
Connect to
receiver
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
188 / Telephone features
Mounting a Norstar telephone on the wall
1
2
3
4
5
6
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Telephone features / 189
Naming a telephone or a line
You can assign names to identify external lines, target lines,
and each set. During a call, the name, if programmed, is shown
on the telephone display instead of the external line number or
internal telephone number of the caller. Step-by-step
instructions for adding or changing the name of a telephone or
a line are in Changing the name of a telephone on page 34.
Telephone names and line names can contain both letters and
numbers, but cannot be longer than seven characters. You
cannot use the # and * symbols.
Tip - You can give the same name to two or more telephones,
or to a telephone and a line in your system. To avoid confusion,
avoid such duplication. Use initials, abbreviations, or even
nicknames to give each telephone a unique name.
If automatic telephone relocation is turned on, the name and
internal number of a telephone are saved if the telephone is
moved within your system.
Moving telephones
You may be required by law to report any telephone moves
to your local telecommunications carrier or 911 service
provider. For further details, consult your local carrier, your
local 911 service provider, and/or your local
telecommunications service provider.
If automatic telephone relocation is enabled in programming
by your installer or customer service representative, you can
move your telephone from one Norstar jack to another without
losing any of its custom programming. If you want to replace
a telephone and cancel the programming, ensure that the
relocation setting is off.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
190 / Telephone features
Stopping calls from ringing at your telephone:
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Stopping calls
Press ≤°fi to stop calls from ringing at your telephone.
Only priority calls ring at your telephone. A line button flashes
when you receive a call, but the call does not ring.
Refusing to answer a call
While you are on a call, you can refuse to answer a second call
(including a priority call).
Press ≤°fi while your telephone is ringing.
Canceling Do Not Disturb
Press ≤£°fi.
Displays
Allow calls
Your telephone receives calls normally.
Using Do Not Disturb
Once you turn Do Not Disturb on, calls are forwarded to the
prime telephone only if there is no other telephone on which
the line appears. If there is another telephone that shares the
same line, the call may be answered by that person. The
Delayed Ring Transfer feature transfers all unanswered calls
to the prime telephone after a specified time.
Do Not Disturb prevents voice calls from alerting at your
telephone. Voice calls are presented as normal intercom calls.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Telephone features / 191
Tip - Norstar sets that are members of a Hunt Group can
temporarily leave a Hunt Group by activating this feature. Hunt
Group calls arriving while a set is in Do Not Disturb mode are
routed to the next member in the Hunt Group. For more
information on Hunt Groups see Programming Hunt Groups on
page 157.
Using Background Music
≤°fl
Use this feature to active the optional music feature. You will
hear whatever music source is attached to the Modular ICS.
Your installer or service representative makes this feature
available to all telephones in programming. You need to
supply a music source, such as a radio, and have it attached to
your ICS.
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license
may be required from the American Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers or a similar
organization if radio or TV broadcasts are
transmitted through the Background Music feature
of this telecommunication system.
Nortel Networks hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Turning Background Music off
The music stops automatically if you make or answer a call.
Or press ≤£°flto turn it off.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
ISDN PRI and BRI
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) technology
provides a fast, accurate and reliable means of sending and
receiving data, image text and voice information through the
telephone system.
By using Primary Rate Interface (PRI) or Basic Rate Interface
(BRI), your ISDN service allows for faster transmission
speeds and the addition of a variety of powerful business
applications, including remote LAN access,
videoconferencing, file transfer and Internet access.
Your installer configures your ISDN services and terminal
equipment.
ISDN PRI
PRI is economical because separate analog trunks and data
circuits are not needed for Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Direct
Outward Dialing (DOD), and data transfer.
With PRI there is greater flexibility because B channels can be
dynamically reconfigured to accommodate changes in traffic
with the Call by Call feature. For more information see Call by
Call service selection for PRI on page 195.
PRI offers fast information access because channel usage is
optimized to allow you the full benefit of available bandwidth
and real-time connectivity.
PRI lines are configured as DID lines. Incoming calls on a PRI
line can appear on a DID button or on an intercom button
depending on how your Norstar set has been configured.
Outgoing calls are made from the intercom buttons.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
ISDN PRI and BRI / 193
PRI lines can be accessed from all devices such as Norstar sets,
Business Series Terminal sets, ISDN sets, and wireless sets.
ISDN PRI features
Selected ISDN network features can be used from a Norstar
telephone. Your central office switch (ISDN network)
determines which features are available to you.
Network Name Display for PRI
Your Norstar system displays the name of an incoming call
when it is available from the service provider. Name
information can be displayed on a Norstar set but not on an
ISDN terminal. If the Calling Party Name has the status of
private it may be displayed as Private name. If the Calling
Party Name is unavailable it may be displayed as Unknown
name.
Your Norstar system displays the name of the called party on
an outgoing call, when it is provided by your service provider.
The Business Name concatenates with the set name on an
outgoing call. This can only occur if the Business Name has
been programmed.
The available features include:
•
•
•
•
•
Receiving Connected Name
Receiving Calling Name
Receiving Redirected Name
Sending Connected Name
Sending Calling Party Name
Consult your customer service representative to determine
which of these features is compatible with your service
provider.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
194 / ISDN PRI and BRI
Name and number blocking for PRI
When activated, ≤°⁄· allows you to block the
outgoing name and/or number on a per-call basis. Name and
number blocking can be used with a Norstar set but not with
an ISDN terminal.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider.
Emergency 911 Dialing
Modular ICS 6.0 with the ISDN PRI feature is capable of
transmitting the telephone number and internal extension
number of a calling station dialing 911 to the Public Switched
Telephone Network. State and local requirements for support
of Emergency 911 Dialing service by Customer Premises
Equipment vary. Consult your local telecommunications
service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws
and regulations.
If transmission of internal extension numbers is not required or
desired, then it is recommended that the System Coordinator
maintain a site map or location directory that allows
emergency personnel to rapidly locate a Norstar set given its
DID number. This list should be kept up to date and readily
available, and can be included with the Programming Record.
Two-way DID
With PRI, the same lines can be used for receiving direct
inward dialing (DID) and for making direct outward dialing
(DOD) calls.
The dialing plan determines how calls are routed.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your service
provider.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 195
Call by Call service selection for PRI
PRI lines can be dynamically allocated to different service
types with the Call by Call feature. PRI lines do not have to be
pre-allocated to a given service type.
Call types that may be available, depending on your service
provider are:
Public
Public calls connect your set with a Central
Office (CO). DID and DOD calls are supported.
Private
Private calls connect your set with a private
network. DID and DOD calls are supported. A
private dialing plan may be used.
Tie
Tie lines are private incoming and outgoing
lines that connect Private Branch Exchanges
(PBX) such as Norstar.
FX
Foreign Exchange calls connect your Norstar
set to a remote CO. It provides the equivalent of
local service at the distant exchange.
Outwats
Outwats is for outgoing calls. This allows you
to originate calls to telephones in a specific
geographical area called a zone or band.
Typically a flat monthly fee is charged for this
service.
Inwats
Inwats is a type of long distance service which
allows you to receive calls originating within
specified areas without a charge to the caller. A
toll-free number is assigned to allow for
reversed billing.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
196 / ISDN PRI and BRI
Dialing Plan and PRI
The Dialing Plan supports PRI connectivity to public and
private networks. The dialing plan is a collection of features
responsible for processing and routing incoming and outgoing
calls. All PRI calls must go through a dialing plan.
The Dialing Plan
•
•
•
•
allows incoming calls to be routed to sets based on service
type and digits received
allows Enbloc dialing by buffering user-dialed digits until
a complete DN has been dialed
provides the ability to map user-dialed digits to a service
type on a Call by Call basis
allows long distance carrier selection via user-dialed
Carrier Access Codes
Depending on the type of dialing plan chosen, you may also
need to specify a Private DN length so the system knows when
the user has completed dialing.
Refer to the Networking chapter in the Modular ICS 6.0
Installer Guide for more details about dialing plans. Consult
your customer service representative to determine how your
dialing plan is configured.
ISDN BRI
Modular ICS 6.0 supports a maximum of 30 ISDN sets on the
system.
The following ISDN services are supported:
•
•
•
incoming calls
outgoing calls
Calling Line Identification Presentation
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 197
•
•
•
Sub-addressing
bearer capabilities
teleservices
The Call Forward All Calls feature can be used from ISDN
terminals connected to Modular ICS.
Note: Norstar and Business Series Terminal telephones can
accept voice calls only. Video and data calls do not alert
at a Norstar set.
Although an ISDN S-loop or LT-loop can support up to eight
devices, the loop has a limit of two B-channels. If both Bchannels are in use, other devices on that loop cannot make or
receive calls until a B-channel is available, or until both Bchannels are available, in the case of a video terminal. Thus,
the number of terminals installed must take into account
whether you require dedicated access for the terminals on that
loop.
Note: Set features, other than Transfer and Call Forward All
Calls, are not available to ISDN terminals. In addition,
you cannot retrieve a parked call, or reach a Direct-Dial
set by using the Direct-Dial digit from an ISDN
terminal.
Line access from an ISDN terminal
ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys as do
Norstar telephones and Business Series Terminals. To make
an outgoing call from an ISDN terminal, access an external
line by entering a line pool code or by using the ARS feature.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
198 / ISDN PRI and BRI
ISDN BRI features
Selected ISDN network features can be used from a Norstar
telephone. Your central office switch (ISDN network)
determines which features are available to you.
Network Name Display for BRI
Your Norstar system displays the name of an incoming call
when it is available from the service provider. Name
information can be displayed on a Norstar set but not on an
ISDN terminal. If the Calling Party Name has the status of
private it may be displayed as Private name. If the Calling
Party Name is unavailable it may be displayed as Unknown
name.
Your Norstar system displays the name of the called party on
an outgoing call, when it is provided by your service provider.
As with PRI, your Norstar system sends the Business Name
concatenated with the set name on an outgoing call, but only if
a Business Name has been entered for the set.
The available features include:
•
•
•
•
•
receiving connected name
receiving calling name
receiving redirected name
sending connected name
sending calling party name
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your service
provider.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 199
Name and number blocking for BRI
When activated, ≤°⁄· allows you to block the
outgoing name and/or number on a per-call basis. Name and
number blocking can be used with a Norstar set but not with
an ISDN terminal.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your service
provider.
Service provider features
Consult your customer service representative to determine if
the new ISDN features are supported with your service
provider.
Call Forward
Call Forward allows you to forward your calls to an external
telephone number.
1. Select an ISDN line by selecting a line button, a line pool,
or the Handsfree button, or by lifting the handset (if an
ISDN line is your prime line).
2. Consult your service provider for the appropriate feature
code to enter on your dialpad. Listen for three tones
followed by dial tone.
3. Enter the internal number of the telephone to which you
want your calls forwarded. If the call is answered, stay on
the line for at least five seconds to activate the Call
Forward feature.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
200 / ISDN PRI and BRI
Canceling Call Forward
1. Select an ISDN line by selecting a line button, a line pool,
or the Handsfree button, or by lifting the handset (if an
ISDN line is your prime line).
2. Consult your service provider for the appropriate feature
code to enter on your dialpad. Listen for a series of tones.
3. Press ®.
Calling the number your calls are forwarded to
1. Select an ISDN line by selecting a line button, a line pool,
or the Handsfree button, or by lifting the handset (if an
ISDN line is your prime line).
2. Consult your service provider for the appropriate feature
code to enter on your dialpad.
Automatic Call Back
If you call a number and it is busy, enter the appropriate
feature code designated by your service provider to receive a
distinctive ring at your set when the line becomes available for
calls.
Automatic Recall
Automatic Recall allows you to automatically dial the number
of the last call you received. You may not see the number on
the display if the information is not available from your service
provider, or you do not have Caller ID as part of your ISDN
service.
Consult your service provider for the appropriate feature code
to enter on your dialpad.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 201
MCID
The MCID feature allows you to enter ≤°·‡ to have
call information recorded on the central office system for an
incoming call on a specific line (ETSI EURO ISDN lines,
only).
The user must invoke the feature code either during the active
call or within within 30 seconds (time varies on different
networks) after the caller hangs up, but before the user hangs
up.
MCID prompts
Call traced
The MCID request was accepted by the
network.
No response
No response to the MCID request.
Not incoming
MCID can only be invoked on received
calls.
Not available
The caller information is not available. The
CO is not able to log the information or it is
not an ETSI BRI/PRI type of call.
Not subscribed
MCID feature is not subscribed to.
Invalid state
MCID is not allowed in the current state of
the call.
Not allowed
Invalid interaction with another
supplementary service.
Network Call Diversion
This feature is a network function that allows forwarding and
redirection of calls outside the Norstar network when using an
ETSI ISDN line. Functionality is similar to that of External
Call Forward (ECF). NCD redirects calls using the same line
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
202 / ISDN PRI and BRI
on which they arrive. Call forward is efficient since there is no
need for additional outside lines.
ISDN BRI terminals
Your Modular ICS allows connection of eight Basic Rate
Access loops (four 2B+D channels) that can be used for fully
digital connections to ISDN networks and devices. Loops are
connections between the ICS and devices or between the ICS
and the network.
Each loop provides two separate B-channels that can be used
to make two simultaneous voice or data calls, or one data call
and one voice call.
ISDN applications for BRI and PRI
ISDN terminal equipment delivers a wide range of powerful
business applications:
Videoconferencing and video telephony
Video conferencing offers instant visual and audio contact
between distant parties using either studio-based or desktop
ISDN terminals.
Desktop conferencing
ISDN allows computer users in distant locations to share and
edit any image, data or text file on their own computer screens
while they discuss the information.
File transfer
The ISDN network allows you to transfer files containing data,
text, images, data, or audio clips, faster and cheaper than with
a conventional modem.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 203
Telecommuting
Convenient retrieval, processing and storage of files is
possible for the employee working at home by using ISDN
lines to give high-speed access to information resources at the
office.
Group 4 fax
ISDN fax applications save money by increasing both
transmission speed and the quality of resolution.
Remote LAN access
ISDN provides an affordable and fast means for employees at
remote sites (at home or branch offices) to access local area
networks (LANs).
Leased line backup
Essential backup for leased lines can be provided using ISDN
as required, rather than duplicating costly permanent leased
lines.
LAN to LAN bridging
Local area network (LAN) bridge/routers allow flexible
interconnection between LANs using ISDN, with charges
incurred only when information is actually transmitted.
Internet and database access
The fast call set up and high bandwidth of ISDN are ideal for
accessing information services such as the Internet and
databases.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Using System features
Using alternate or scheduled services
There are three types of Services to make your Norstar system
handle calls differently on different days and at different times
of the day: Ringing service, Restriction service and Routing
service.
Each of the three services, and the six schedules available to
each service, are customized for you by your installer or
customer service representative. They program which
telephone is used to turn Services on and off, and display what
Services are in use. This is called the control telephone.
Preventing certain calls from being made
Restriction service prevents a user from making certain kinds
of calls from a telephone or from lines that are available at the
telephone. The restrictions are programmed by your installer
or customer service representative.
Making additional telephones ring
Ringing service makes additional telephones ring for
incoming calls on external lines. For instance, all incoming
external calls can ring at a security telephone during the night.
Or calls to one attendant can ring at another telephone during
lunch. It does not suppress your normal ringing assignment.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Using System features / 205
Changing the lines used by outgoing calls
Routing service allows you to assign alternate routes to calls.
In this way you can take advantage of lower costs available on
particular routes on certain days and at certain times. Both the
regular and alternate routes are programmed by your installer
or customer service representative.
Turning Services on and off
The master control for how different services and their
schedules are used by your system is in programming. There
are three settings: Manual, Automatic and Off.
•
Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any
time from a control telephone using a feature code.
•
Automatic allows you to use the preassigned stop and start
time for a service. You are able to start and stop the service
by entering the appropriate feature code at a control
telephone. If you select this setting, you use the start and
stop times programmed by your installer or customer
service representative.
•
Off prevents the service from being activated.
In the case of restriction settings and routing, this means
that the Normal schedule will be in effect.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ‘ twice.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
206 / Using System features
4. Press ≠ at Services.
5. Press ‘ until you see the Service you want to
program.
6. Press ≠ and ‘ until you see the
schedule you want to program.
7. Press ≠ and use CHANGE to select the setting that
works best for your office: Off, Manual or Automatic.
Each schedule can have its own configuration of a Service
which works independently of automatic start and stop times.
For example, there may be a version of Restriction service
called Night Schedule that prevents anyone from making long
distance calls. But calling it Night Schedule does not mean it
can only be used with a schedule. You can turn the Night
Schedule for Restriction Service on or off as needed any time
of the day or night. If you decide to run a service on a schedule,
the system uses the start and stop times used for that schedule.
An example of how to turn on a Service manually
You may have Ringing service, as your night service, set up to
run according to the Night Schedule. You may decide you
want that ringing arrangement to come into effect only when it
is turned on and off manually.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ‘ twice.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 207
4. Press ≠ at Services. The display reads
Ringing Serviceˆ.
5. Press ≠. The display reads Sched:Nightˆ.
6. Press ≠ and use CHANGE to set the Service to
Manual.
Night Schedule for Ringing Service no longer follows the
schedule but can be turned on and off by using the feature code
and selecting Night Ringing. See Turning Services on and off
using feature codes on page 207.
Turning Services on and off using feature codes
The master control for services is in programming. See
Turning Services on and off on page 205. Day-to-day use of
Services is controlled using the following feature codes.
≤°‡⁄
Turns on Ringing service. When used at the
direct-dial telephone, it activates the
alternate direct-dial telephone (extra-dial
telephone).
≤£°‡⁄
Turns off Ringing service.
≤°‡¤
Turns on Restriction service.
≤£°‡¤
Turns off Restriction service.
≤°‡‹
Turns on Routing service.
≤£°‡‹
Turns off Routing service.
To turn a Service on:
1. Enter the appropriate feature code from a control
telephone.
2. For Restriction and Routing service you have to enter the
System Coordinator or Basic password.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
208 / Using System features
3. Press NEXT to move through the schedules until the display
shows the version of the service you want to be turned on.
4. Press OK to select the setting, or press QUIT to exit the
feature without making any changes.
To turn a Service off:
1. Enter the appropriate feature code from a control
telephone.
2. For Restriction and Routing service you have to enter the
System Coordinator or Basic password.
Do not confuse activating Normal service with
canceling a Service.
Setting a Service to Normal is not the same as
canceling a Service using a feature code. If you set
the Service to Normal, the normal version of a
Service overrides any automatic schedule and
remains in effect until you manually cancel it. If you
cancel the Service, you return to the automatic
schedule.
Viewing the active Services on a two-line display
When a Service is active, the control telephone display reads
Services ON.
1. Press LIST. The display shows the first active Service and
the schedule that is in use.
2. If there are several active Services, press NEXT to see them
all.
3. Press EXIT to exit the feature.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 209
Viewing the active Services on a one-line display
1. Press ≤°‡‚. The display shows the first active
Service.
2. Press £ to move through the active schedule.
3. Press ® to exit.
Displays
<Sched> Restr'n
EXIT
NEXT
You are viewing the active Services. Press
£ or NEXT to see the other active
Services. Press ® or EXIT to quit.
<Sched> Restr'n
QUIT
OK
NEXT
The name of the current Restriction
service schedule displays. Press £ or
NEXT to see the other Ringing service
schedules. Press ≥ or OK to select the
desired schedule.
<Sched> Ringing
EXIT
NEXT
You are viewing the active Services. Press
£ or NEXT to see the other active
Services. Press ® or EXIT to quit.
<Sched> Ringing
QUIT
OK
NEXT
The name of the current Ringing service
schedule displays. Press £ or NEXT to see
the other Ringing service schedules. Press
≥ or OK to select the desired schedule.
<Sched> Routing
EXIT
NEXT
You are viewing the active Services. Press
£ or NEXT to see the other active
Services. Press ® or EXIT to quit.
<Sched> Routing
QUIT
OK
NEXT
The name of the current Routing service
schedule displays. Press £ or NEXT to see
the other Routing service schedules. Press
≥ or OK to select the desired schedule.
<Sched> until *
QUIT
OK
NEXT
Press ≥ or OK to select this schedule,
£ or NEXT to see the next available
schedule, or ® or QUIT to exit. If you
select this schedule, it is in effect until the
next automatic schedule takes effect.
No services ON
P0992640 02
You have entered the Show Services
feature code and there is no active
Service.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
210 / Using System features
Services
ON
LIST
There is a Service active in your system.
Press • or LIST to view the active
Services.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 243.
Services that have been turned on automatically are indicated
by an asterisk (*) before the name on the display. You can
neither manually activate nor cancel scheduled services,
although you can override them by manually turning on
another schedule.
The control telephone can override Services that are turned on
and off according to a schedule at any time by entering a
Services feature code, and selecting a different schedule. This
override remains in effect until it is canceled. If you select a
schedule with an asterisk (*), the next automatic service
schedule comes into effect at the programmed time.
Direct-dial calls to a direct-dial telephone ring at the extra-dial
telephone only when you enter the Ringing service feature
code (≤°‡⁄) at that direct-dial telephone. Note that
only the extra-dial telephone is activated, not the actual
Ringing service. This is the case unless that direct-dial
telephone is a control telephone. The extra-dial telephone is
designated by your installer or customer service
representative.
Tip - Norstar provides six service schedules named Night,
Lunch, Evening, Sched 4, Sched 5, and Sched 6. Your installer
or customer service representative can change these names to
suit your business.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 211
Using passwords
Your passwords prevent unauthorized or unintentional
changes to your Norstar system. To keep your telephone
service secure, distribute the password only to selected
personnel or make use of the basic password described below.
Record your password in a secure place and change it
periodically.
If you forget the administration or basic passwords, you
cannot do any programming. Call your customer service
representative to assign a new password.
The password is a one to six-digit number. It is advised to
make your password at least six digits long for security
reasons. If you press CHANGE but do not enter a new password,
the existing password is erased. Anyone can then access
programming without a password.
The default System Coordinator password is ÅΘȈ,
which is the same as ¤‹fl›fl.
One password cannot be a subset of another one. For example,
you cannot have 123 and 12345.
Using a Basic password
In addition to a System Coordinator password, there is a Basic
password. This allows you to delegate some of the duties of
being a system coordinator to someone else without allowing
access to sensitive programming.
The default Basic password is ıÅÍÈÇ or
¤¤‡›¤.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
212 / Using System features
You can enter the Basic password after the following feature
codes:
•
≤•• Ë͉ to access User Preferences)
•
≤ ••ÊȘ‰ to change the system time and
date)
Because the Basic password can be used to change the time,
you should give it out with care and change it when necessary,
for example, when an employee leaves the company. If
restrictions, routing or other services operate on a schedule,
changing the time can allow someone to bypass the
programming.
Registration password
The Registration password is used to control the registration of
Companion portables to the Norstar system. See the Modular
ICS Companion System Coordinator Guide for more
information.
Changing passwords
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ‘ four times.
4. Press ≠ at Passwords.
5. Press ‘ until you see Progrming pswds ˆ.
6. Press ≠.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 213
7. Press ‘ until you see the name of the password
you want to change.
8. Use ≠, CHANGE and the dialpad to enter the new
password. Press OK to accept the new password.
You cannot erase or eliminate the ability to program
passwords.
Clearing a Call Log password
If an individual has forgotten their Call Log password, you can
clear it in programming. The individual can then enter a new
password from his or her telephone.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ‘ four times.
4. Press ≠ at Passwords.
5. Press ‘ until the display reads Call log pswds.
6. Press ≠ and enter the internal telephone number
of the telephone where you want to clear the Call Log
password.
7. Press ≠, then press CLR to clear the password.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
214 / Using System features
Hospitality password
There are two passwords within the Hospitality feature. One
provides secure access to the administration set for
programming the service, and one provides secure access to a
room condition setting from each room set for housekeeping
staff.
Desk pswd
Change this password frequently, to maintain security.
At Hospitality:
1. Press ≠.
2. Desk pswd:4677 displays.
3. Press CHANGE.
4. New pswd: displays
5. Enter a new password, then press OK.
Cond pswd
Change this password frequently, to maintain security.
At Hospitality:
1. Press ≠.
2. Press ‘
3. Cond pswd:None displays.
4. Press CHANGE.
5. New pswd: displays
6. Enter a new password, then press OK.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 215
Silent Monitor password
Users must enter a password when they use ≤•fifi‚
to monitor Hunt group calls.
It is advisable to change this password frequently.
At SM Passwd (default: 745368 (SILENT)):
1. Press CHANGE.
New pswd: displays
2. Use the keypad to enter a new password.
3. Press OK.
Using special telephones
Direct-dial
You can reach the direct-dial telephone by dialing a single
digit. The direct-dial telephone is usually in a central location,
such as at the desk of an administrative assistant or attendant.
You can have up to five direct-dial telephones for your Norstar
system. It is usually the prime telephone or the central
answering position (CAP).
The direct-dial telephone can send up to 30 messages and can
invoke Services to activate the extra-dial telephone.
You cannot forward calls to a direct-dial telephone that is
outside your Norstar system. See Making changes to Call
Forward No Answer on page 36.
Note: ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct-Dial digit to
reach a Direct-Dial set.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
216 / Using System features
Changing the direct-dial telephone assignments
Your installer or customer service representative sets up the
direct-dial telephone.
You can change which direct-dial telephone a telephone is
assigned to, or assign it no direct-dial telephone.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ at Terminals&Sets.
4. Enter the internal number of the telephone you want to
program and press ≠. The display reads
Capabilities.
5. Press ≠.
6. Press ‘ until the display reads D-Dial.
7. Press CHANGE to select Set1, Set2, Set3, Set4, Set5 or
None.
Any number of telephones can be assigned to call the
direct-dial telephone.
Tip - The digit you dial in order to get the direct-dial
telephone to ring can be programmed by your installer or
customer service representative.
The Norstar system cannot verify that the number you assign as
an external direct-dial telephone is valid. Check the number
before assigning it as a direct-dial telephone, and call the
direct-dial telephone after you’ve assigned it in order to test it.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 217
Hotline
A hotline telephone calls a preset internal or external
telephone number when you pick up the receiver (or press the
button marked Handsfree/Mute).
Tip - Label the telephone to inform anyone using it that
Hotline is active.
Bypassing a Hotline
Press a line button, or use the Pre-Dial or Automatic Dial
feature before you pick up the receiver or press the button
marked Handsfree/Mute on a hotline telephone. See the
Telephone Feature Card or see Changing how you dial your
calls on page 72.
Making a telephone a hotline telephone
You can set up a telephone as a hotline.
Tip - A Hunt Group set DN can be specified as a Hotline
telephone. For more information on Hunt Groups see
Programming Hunt Groups on page 157.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ at Terminals&Sets.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
218 / Using System features
4. Enter the internal number of the telephone you want to
program and press ≠. The display reads
Capabilities.
5. Press ≠.
6. Press ‘ until the display reads Hotline.
7. Press CHANGE to select the type of call the hotline makes:
None, Intrnl, or Extrnl.
• Internl assigns an internal number.
• External assigns an external number.
If you select an external number, you can select the line on
which the call is made:
• the prime line
• an external line
• a line in a line pool, and a line pool access code
For this type of line, you must specify the line pool
access code.
• a line selected by the routing table
For this type of line, the number dialed is treated as a
destination code and is routed according to the routing
tables.
A prime line, line pool access codes, and access to a line pool
can be programmed by your installer or customer service
representative.
Control telephone
The control telephone allows you to place the telephones and
external lines for which it has responsibility into and out of
service schedules. See Using alternate or scheduled services
on page 204. Settings for this telephone can be copied from
one control telephone to another.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 219
SM Supervisor
A telephone designated as an SM Supervisor allows you to
monitor Hunt group calls without or without a conference tone
indicator to the other two parties. See Using Silent Monitor on
page 169.
Using Set lock
Set lock limits the ways in which you can customize your
telephone. There are three levels of Set Lock: Full, Partial, and
None. None allows you to access all features on your
telephone.
Partial prevents:
• programming autodial
buttons
• programming user speed dial
numbers
• programming feature buttons
• moving line buttons
• changing the display
language
• changing dialing modes
(Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial, and
Standard Dial)
• using Voice Call Deny
• saving a number with Saved
Number Redial
Full, in addition to the restrictions outlined for Partial lock,
prevents:
•
•
•
•
P0992640 02
changing Background Music
changing Privacy
changing Do Not Disturb
using Ring Again
•
•
•
•
using Call Forward all calls
using Send Message
using Trunk Answer
activating Services
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
220 / Using System features
Changing Set Lock programming for a telephone
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ at Terminals&Sets and enter the
internal number of the telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
5. Press ‘ until the display reads Restrictions.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘ until the display reads Set lock.
8. Use CHANGE to select one of the three options: None,
Partial and Full.
Using an auxiliary ringer
An auxiliary ringer is a separate device that has to be
connected to Norstar.
Turning the auxiliary ringer for a telephone on or off
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ at Terminals&Sets.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 221
4. Enter the internal number of the telephone you want to
program and press ≠. The display reads
Capabilities.
5. Press ≠.
6. Press ‘ until the display reads Aux. ringer.
7. Use CHANGE to select Y (Yes) or N (No).
Your installer or customer service representative can program
the auxiliary ringer to start ringing for incoming lines as part
of Ringing Service.
Using Host System dialing signals
You can access host systems, such as private branch
exchanges (PBX) from Norstar by using host system signaling
features (known as end-to-end signaling). These features
either send a special signal to the host system or allow you to
program delays required by host systems in external autodial
or speed dial sequences.
Link
≤‡⁄
If your Norstar system is connected to a private branch
exchange (PBX), you can use a Link signal to access special
features. On some telephones, Link is called FLASH.
The Link signal can be included as part of a longer stored
sequence on an external autodial button or in a speed dial code.
The Link symbol (¤) uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
222 / Using System features
Preventing a telephone from using Link
Link can be restricted at individual telephones. You need the
programming template found at the front of this guide. See
Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more information.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹››.
2. Press ¤‹fl›fl (the default System Coordinator
password).
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
5. Press ‘ three times. The display reads
Restrictions.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘ three times. The display reads Allow
link:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
Tip - If your Norstar system is connected to a private branch
exchange (PBX), program Link onto a memory button for onetouch access.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 223
Pause
≤‡°
The Pause feature enters a 1.5-second delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line. This is often required for
signaling remote devices, such as answering machines, or
when reaching through to PBX features or host systems.
You can program more than one pause in an external autodial
or speed dial sequence.
The Pause symbol (›) uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence.
For pulse dialing, • inserts a 1.5-second pause into the
dialing sequence.
Long Tones
The Long Tones feature allows you to control the length of a
tone so that you can signal devices such as fax or answering
machines which require tones longer than the standard 120
milliseconds.
1. While on a call, press ≤°‚°.
2. Press the dialpad buttons to produce the appropriate tones.
Each tone sounds for as long as you hold down the button.
Long tones can be used on any call except a conference call.
You can use internal lines of the Norstar system to activate a
device connected to an analog terminal adapter (ATA) in
another area of your office, or external lines to access devices
outside the Norstar system.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
224 / Using System features
Displays
Long Tones:
At the appropriate time, press any
dialpad button. Hold each button down
for as long as necessary. Press ≤ or
≥ to cancel Long Tones.
Programmed Release
≤•°·
The Programmed Release feature performs same function as
® in a programmed dialing sequence. When the system
encounters Programmed Release in a dialing sequence, it stops
dialing and hangs up the call.
The Programmed Release symbol (fi) takes up two of the 24
spaces in a programmed dialing sequence.
The system ignores any digits or commands that follow a
Programmed Release in a programmed dialing sequence.
Run/Stop
≤•·
Run/Stop inserts a break point into a sequence of dialed
numbers or characters used for automatic dialing. This may be
necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar host
system.
For example, you can call a company with an automated
attendant that instructs you to dial the internal number you
need. You can program the company number, a Run/Stop,
then the internal number on one external autodial button. Press
the autodial button once to dial the company number. When
you hear the automated attendant, press the autodial button
again to dial the internal number.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 225
The Run/Stop symbol (fl) uses one of the 24 spaces in an
autodial or speed dial sequence.
You can include up to three Run/Stop commands in a dialing
string. The system ignores a fourth Run/Stop, and any digits or
commands that follow it in a programmed dialing sequence.
Wait for Dial Tone
≤°‚›
Wait for Dial Tone causes a sequence of numbers to pause
until dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial.
This is useful if you must dial a remote system and then wait
for dial tone from that system before dialing the rest of your
number.
The Wait for Dial Tone symbol (‡) uses two of the 24 spaces
in an autodial or speed dial sequence.
Displays
Invalid code
You have entered a code that can be
used only in a programmed autodial or
speed dial sequence, not on a call you
dial directly. Programmed Release and
Run/Stop are for use in programmed
dialing sequences only.
Using pulse dialing for a call
If your external telephone lines use pulse dialing, you can
temporarily switch to tone dialing by pressing £ after
selecting the line. Tone dialing allows your Norstar telephone
communicate with devices and services that respond to tone
signals, such as automatic switchboards, and fax or answering
machines.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
226 / Using System features
Using your Norstar system from an external location
You can use the lines and some of the features of a Norstar
system from outside the system. You can do this over the
public telephone network when you are away from the office,
or you can call from another system, over a private network.
An example of how remote access works is a sales
representative who spends a lot of time out of the office needs
to make long distance calls to the European office. Your
Norstar system has a leased line to Europe with reduced
transatlantic charges. You provide the sales representative
with a Class of Service password that gives access to the
transatlantic line. The sales representative can then telephone
into the Norstar system from a hotel, enter their Class of
Service password, and use the leased transatlantic line to make
calls.
Remote users can access Norstar lines, line pools, the page
feature, and remote administration, if that features is enabled
through Software Keys. The exact facilities available to you
through remote access vary depending on how your installer or
customer service representative set up your system.
Tip - If the loop start line used for remote access is not
supervised, auto-answer does not function and the caller hears
ringing instead of a stuttered tone or the system dial tone.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 227
Controlling access to your Norstar system
It is important to maintain the security of your Norstar system
by limiting access to authorized users and limiting those users
to the features they need.
Remote users can make long distance calls.
Remember that a remote user can make long
distance calls that are charged to your company and
can make page announcements in your office.
Direct inward system access (DISA)
Control access to your Norstar system with direct inward
system access (DISA). Access to your Norstar system from the
public telephone network should always be controlled with
DISA. If your installer or customer service representative
programs the line used for remote access to answer a call
automatically and wait for a DISA internal number, callers
hear a stuttered dial tone and must enter a Class of Service
password before they are allowed into the system.
Class of Service (COS)
To control the level of telephone service a remote user can
access, your installer can assign a remote filter and remote
package to the line used for remote access. The remote filter
restricts the numbers that can be dialed on the line, and the
remote package restricts the use of line pools and the page
feature. To change the restrictions for the line, the user can
enter their Class of Service (COS) password when the system
answers with DISA, or can dial the DISA internal number and
enter their Class of Service password.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
228 / Using System features
Maintaining security
To maintain the security of your system, the following
practices are recommended:
•
Warn anyone to whom you give the remote access number,
to keep it confidential.
•
Change Class of Service passwords often.
•
Warn anyone to whom you give a Class of Service
password, to remember it and not to write it down.
•
Remove the Class of Service password of anyone who
leaves your company.
Accessing Norstar remotely over the public network
1. Dial the Norstar system remote access number.
2. When you hear a stuttered dial tone, enter your COS
password.
3. Wait for the system dial tone.
To use the system remotely, you must use a telephone with
tone dialing to call the system.
Remote access is possible only on lines that your installer or
customer service representative programs to auto-answer
calls.
To use features on a remote Norstar system, press • followed
by the feature code. Even if you are calling from a Norstar
system, press • instead of ≤.
In certain situations, you may experience lower volume levels
when using Norstar remotely.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 229
Tones
You may hear some of the following tones while accessing
Norstar remotely.
Tone
What it means
Busy tone
Dialed a busy line pool access code. You hear
system dial tone again after 5 seconds.
Norstar system dial
tone
You may use the Norstar remotely.
Fast busy tone
You have done one of the following
• Entered an incorrect COS password. Your
call is disconnected after five seconds.
• Taken too long while entering a COS
password. Your call is disconnected after
five seconds.
• Tried to use a line pool or feature not
permitted by your Class of Service. You
hear system dial tone again after five
seconds.
• Dialed a number in the Norstar system
which does not exist. Your call is
disconnected after five seconds.
Stuttered dial tone
P0992640 02
Enter your COS password.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
230 / Using System features
Using Class of Service (COS) passwords
Class of Service passwords permit controlled access to a
system’s resources both by internal and remote users. When
you enter a Class of Service password at a telephone, the
restriction filters associated with your Class of Service
password apply, rather than the normal restriction filters.
Similarly, when a remote user enters a Class of Service
password on an incoming auto-answer line, the restriction
filters and remote package associated with their Class of
Service password apply, rather than the normal restriction
filters and remote package. COS passwords are programmed
by either your customer service representative or installer.
Users should memorize their COS passwords instead of
writing them down. Typically, each user has a separate
password. Several users can share a password or one user can
have several passwords.
Individual COS passwords should be deleted when an
employee leaves the company. Group COS passwords should
be changed if one of the group members leaves the company.
Changing your Class of Service
You must enter a Class of Service password each time you
want to make a call that is normally restricted on a line or
telephone.
To change the restriction filters on a line or telephone:
1. Press ≤fl°.
2. Enter your six-digit COS password.
COS passwords allow you to define individual passwords and
determine the restriction filters, and remote package
associated with each.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Using System features / 231
Tip - If you use your Norstar system from outside the office,
you may have to enter a Class of Service password to gain
access to the system. See Using your Norstar system from an
external location on page 226.
Displays
(Blank display) Enter your password. It is not
shown on the display.
Invalid Password
P0992640 02
You have entered a password that is not
programmed into your system.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
General System features
The following features are available for the entire Norstar
system.
Set profile
Set profile allows you to view but not change the programming
settings for each Norstar set. You can access Set Profile from
any M7310, M7324, or T7316 set, even while you are on a
call.
1. Press ≤••Í‰Ê.
2. Enter the internal number of the telephone whose
programming you want to review.
3. Use BACK, SHOW and NEXT to navigate through the settings.
Line profile
Line profile allows you to view but not change the
programming settings for each Norstar line. You can access
Line Profile from any M7310, M7324, or T7316 set, even
while you are on a call.
1. Press ≤••ÒȈ‰.
2. Enter the number of the line whose programming you want
to review.
3. Use BACK, SHOW and NEXT to navigate through the settings.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
General System features / 233
Pulse or tone dialing
If your external lines use pulse dialing, you can switch
temporarily to tone dialing to communicate with devices such
as answering machines, to access the features that PBX
systems may offer, or to use another Norstar system remotely.
Press £ while on an active line. Once you hang up, your
telephone returns to pulse dialing.
Disconnect supervision
When Disconnect Supervision is assigned to a line, the Norstar
system monitors it to detect if an external caller hangs up. This
allows the system to release the line for other uses. Your
installer or customer service representative assigns disconnect
supervision.
Hunt Groups
Your Norstar system allows you to establish Hunt Groups.
Hunt Groups are a group of Norstar sets that can be called by
a single directory number. The Hunt Groups feature ensures
calls are easily routed to the appropriate people.
You can also monitor hunt group calls using the Silent
Monitoring feature.
For more information about Hunt Groups and the Silent
Monitoring feature see Programming Hunt Groups on page
157.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
234 / General System features
Internal numbers
Each telephone in the Norstar system has its own internal
number. The length of internal numbers in your system can be
from two to seven digits on a non-expanded system, and three
to seven digits on an expanded system. All numbers in your
system are the same length. Your installer or customer service
representative sets the length of internal numbers, called the
DN length. The default DN length is three.
To find out your internal number, use the Button Inquiry
feature (≤•‚) on an intercom button. On the M7100 or
the T7100 sets, Button Inquiry shows your internal number,
followed by the function assigned to your single-memory
button.
Line assignment
Any of the lines in your system can be assigned to any of your
telephones. Your installer or customer service representative
assigns lines to telephones in Configuration programming.
Lines can be assigned to appear only, appear and ring, or to
ring only.
Usually, only the lines that are appropriate for a particular
person appear at their telephone. When a line is assigned to a
telephone, it is automatically given a line button on that
telephone, if a button is available. The M7100 and the T7100
sets do not have line buttons.
Calls on lines that ring but do not appear at a telephone are
presented at an intercom button.
You may be able to answer a call on a line that does not appear
or ring at your telephone. To pick up such a call, use Call
Pickup, Call Park, or Trunk Answer.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
General System features / 235
A telephone may have buttons assigned for lines 001 to 003,
but have only lines 001 and 002 programmed to ring as well.
An incoming call on any of the three lines causes a line button
indicator to flash, and the telephone can be used to answer the
call. This is especially useful for people who monitor other
telephone lines, but want only their own lines to ring.
Target line
A target line is used to route a call directly to a particular
telephone or group of telephones. Target lines are used only
for incoming calls. A single incoming line may provide
connections to several different target lines. This allows each
person or department in the office to have their own number
without having a separate external line for each number.
Tip - The maximum number of target lines available in the fully
expanded XC system is 192.
Maxi system: lines 157-284
Expanded: lines 157-348
Line pools
A line pool allows each telephone access to external lines from
a group (or pool) of external lines. You can access such lines
by pressing an intercom button and entering a line pool access
code or by pressing a memory button programmed with the
line pool feature code and a line pool access code.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
236 / General System features
Overflow call routing
If a call comes in for a target line that is busy, Norstar routes
the call to the prime telephone for that target line. If there is no
prime telephone assigned to the target line or if a call cannot
be directed to a target line, the call goes to the prime telephone
for the external line used.
Overflow routing for incoming calls is used with the Routing
Service programmed by your installer. A Service must be
active for overflow routing to be in effect. Overflow routing is
not available in Normal service.
Tips - When you make a call and the programmed route is
busy, you hear the expensive route warning tone and see a
display indicating that an expensive route is being used. To
avoid using the normal, expensive route, release your call.
Because overflow routing directs calls using different line
pools, a call may be affected by different line filters when it is
handled by overflow routing.
If you are not sure how the filters are assigned, refer to the
Programming Record for a description of line filters and for a
list of line assignments.
M7100 and T7100 sets
Because these sets do not have line buttons, they work
differently from other Norstar telephones.
•
Where other telephones can require that you select a line
button to answer a call, on the these sets you simply pick
up the receiver.
•
Where other telephones require you to select a line button
to take a call off hold, you press ≥ on the these sets.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
General System features / 237
•
Also on these sets, you can answer a second call by
pressing ≥. Your active call is put on hold and you are
connected to the waiting call. You can have no more than
two calls at a time.
There is no Handsfree button on these sets. When applicable,
special instructions for the sets are included with each feature
description.
Memory buttons
Memory buttons are the buttons with indicators on the M7208,
M7310, M7324, T7208, and T7316 sets. The M7310 also has
dual buttons without indicators. There is a single memory
button, without an indicator, on the M7100 and the T7100 sets.
Memory buttons can be used as answer, autodial, line, and
programmed feature buttons. Line, intercom and answer
buttons must have indicators.
One-line display
The M7100, M7208, T7100 and T7208 sets have a one-line
display. Other sets have a second line on the display which
shows the functions of the three buttons directly below it.
These indicators are known as display buttons.
Some display buttons, such as TRANSFER and ALL, are simply
shortcuts which are not available on a one-line display.
Other display buttons, such as OK and SHOW, perform essential
functions. For a one-line display telephone, use the following
buttons instead of these display buttons.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
238 / General System features
Substitutes for display buttons
Display button
Dialpad
button
Display
button
Dialpad
button
OK
≥
CANCEL
£
QUIT
®
VIEW
£
ADD
•
OVERRIDE
£
SHOW
£
BKSP
√
All displays listed in this book are shown as they appear on the
two-line display.
Prime line
Your telephone can be programmed to select an internal or
external line or a line pool automatically whenever you lift the
receiver or press the key labeled Handsfree/Mute. This is your
prime line.
Private lines
A private line is exclusive to a particular telephone. Calls that
are put on hold or left unanswered on a private line cannot be
picked up at any telephone except the prime telephone.
Volume bar
The volume bar controls the volume of the receiver, telephone
ringer, handsfree speaker, and headset. Press either end of the
volume bar √ to adjust the volume.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Troubleshooting
Using the alarm telephone
An alarm telephone displays Modular MICS system alarm
codes, should they occur. Alarm telephones are Norstar
telephones or Business Series Terminals with two lines
displays that are specifically assigned by the installer to
receive system alarm codes.
Reporting and recording alarm codes
If an alarm message appears on the alarm telephone display:
1. Record the alarm number.
2. Press TIME and record the time displayed.
3. Call your installer or customer service representative and
report the alarm code.
4. After speaking to your installer or customer service
representative, press CLEAR.
Displays
Alarm:
TIME
61-4-2
CLEAR
Report this alarm and the time it occurred
to your installer or customer service
representative.
Testing the telephone
If you suspect something is wrong with a button, the speaker,
the displays, or some other part of the telephone hardware, you
can do a quick test to see which part of the telephone is broken.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
240 / Troubleshooting
Tip - Ensure that the function of a button matches its label by
pressing ≤•‚and then the button to see its function.
You can end the telephone testing session anytime by pressing
® or ≤ unless you are testing those buttons. The test
feature times-out after 30 minutes of no activity.
Testing the telephone display
Use a display test if you suspect that one of the indicators on
the telephone is not working.
1. Press ≤°‚fi. The display reads Display test.
2. Press TEST or ≥ to go ahead with a display test.
3. Adjust the contrast for the telephone display so you are
able to see the test results clearly. Enter a number to
change the contrast or press DOWN and UP.
4. Press OK or ≥ to go ahead with the test.
During the test, the display should be filled with solid, dark
blocks and all the indicators next to the buttons on the
telephone should be turned on. Any Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
or CAP modules that are attached to the telephone should be
completely lit. You lose any information that was showing on
the BLF before the test started.
Pressing any button ends the test.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Troubleshooting / 241
Testing the telephone buttons
1. Press ≤°‚fi, then £ or NEXT.
2. Press TEST or ≥ to go ahead with a button test.
3. Press button to see its function. If the button you pressed
uses an indicator, it turns on when you test the button.
4. Pressing the ® button puts Rls button on the display
briefly and returns you to the Button test display.
Testing the speaker in the telephone handset
The handset test is not available if you have a headset plugged
into the telephone.
1. Press ≤°‚fi, then £ or NEXT twice. The display
reads Handset test.
2. Press TEST or ≥ to go ahead with a handset test.
3. Pick up the handset and listen. Dial tone sounds through
the handset at maximum volume. The volume is reset to
maximum only while the test is going on.
4. Pressing any button or hanging up ends the test.
Testing the telephone headset
The headset test is not available to telephones that do not have
a headset jack or a headset plugged in.
1. Press ≤°‚fi, then £ or NEXT until the display
reads Headset test.
2. Press TEST or ≥ to go ahead with a headset test.
You should hear dial tone through the headset. The volume
is reset to a default level during the test.
3. Pressing any button ends the test.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
242 / Troubleshooting
Testing the telephone speaker
1. Press ≤°‚fi, then £ or NEXT until the display
reads Speaker test.
2. Press TEST or ≥ to go ahead with a speaker test.
A page tone sounds through the telephone speaker at the
maximum volume. The volume returns to its previous
setting when you end the test.
3. Pressing any button ends the test.
Testing the power supply to a telephone
1. Press ≤°‚fi, then £ or NEXT until the display
reads Power test.
2. Press TEST or ≥ to go ahead with a power supply test.
You should see all the indicators on the telephone go on and
hear ringing at maximum volume. When the test has ended, the
display should briefly show Power OK.
The test lasts for five seconds or until you press a button.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Common feature displays
You may see the following displays when you use a feature.
Access denied
Someone is already using programming,
or the feature you are trying to use is not
compatible with the configuration of the
telephone or line.
Denied in admin
You have tried to use a feature, but you
have not been given access to it in
administration programming.
Feature timeout
You have taken more than 15 seconds to
press a button in response to a display.
Inactive feature
You have entered a feature code that is
used by an application program that your
system does not have.
Invalid code
You have entered an invalid feature code.
Not available
You have tried to use a feature that is not
available in the present setup of your
Norstar system.
Set locked
You cannot use the feature you have
chosen because your telephone is locked.
See Using Set lock on page 219.
1234567890123...
VIEW‚
OK
Press £ or press VIEW‚ or ·VIEW to view
a number that is too long to fit on the
display. Press ≥ or OK when you are
finished.
§
This indicates a long distance call. (May be
available with Call Display services.)
239>221
You are receiving an internal call from
telephone 239 forwarded by telephone 221
or you have an Answer button for
telephone 221 and an internal call from
239 is ringing on 221.
221
TRANSFER
P0992640 02
You are connected to an internal call.
Press TRANSFER to transfer the call.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
244 / Common feature displays
221 calling
You are receiving a call from telephone
221.
Call 221?
YES
NO
You have received a Ring Again offer for a
call to an internal telephone. Press the
flashing internal line button or YES to call
the number again. On the M7100 or T7100
set, just lift the receiver. Otherwise, press
NO or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again
offer to expire. For an explanation of Ring
Again, see Using Ring Again on page 76.
Camped:
The person to whom you camped the call
did not answer it. The call has come back
to you. Press the line button or CALLBACK to
reconnect to the call.
221
CALLBACK
Line001
TRANSFER
You are connected to an external call.
Press TRANSFER to transfer the call.
Line001>221
You are receiving an external call
forwarded from telephone 221 or you have
an answer button for telephone 221 and an
external call is ringing on that telephone.
Line001
transfer
The call on line 001 is being transferred to
you by someone else in your Norstar
system.
Line001
waiting
A camped call is waiting. Press the line
button or use Call Queuing to answer the
call. Press ≥ if you have an M7100 or
T7100 sets.
No calls waiting
You tried to use Call Queuing but no call
was ringing at your telephone.
No line selected
There is no call ringing at your telephone.
If you have a flashing line button but your
telephone is not ringing, press the line
button to answer the call on that line.
Not in service
The telephone to which you directed a call
is not in service or is otherwise
unavailable. The call is returned to your
telephone.
Parked call
No one answered the call you parked. The
call has come back to you.
CALLBACK
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Common feature displays / 245
Pick up receiver
You have used the Call Queuing feature
without picking up the receiver. Auto
Handsfree has not been assigned to your
telephone. You must use the receiver or
the button marked Handsfree/Mute to
answer a call.
Priority> 221
BLOCK
You are receiving a priority call. If you are
on another call, inform the person you are
speaking to that you are about to put the
call on hold. Press the flashing line
indicator of the priority call or wait until the
call connects automatically (eight
seconds). The priority call goes through
when you hear the next beep. Your active
call is placed on Exclusive Hold. It is
reconnected automatically when the
priority call ends, unless you transfer the
priority call, in which case you must press
the line button of your original call to
reconnect). Use DND (≤°fi) or press
BLOCK to reject a priority call.
Release a call
You have no free line buttons on which to
receive a call. Release one of your current
calls and try again to answer the incoming
call.
Use line pool?
YES
NO
You have received a Ring Again offer for a
line pool. Press the flashing internal line
button or YES to use the line pool. On the
M7100 and T7100 sets, just lift the
receiver. Otherwise, press NO or wait 30
seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire.
Hold or release
You cannot program a feature button while
you are on a call.
Release calls
You have tried to use a feature while you
were on a call or had calls on hold. Release
the call or calls, before using the feature.
Line in use
The line is in use. Make the call using
normal methods or wait until the line is free.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
246 / Common feature displays
No button free
You have tried to make, receive or pick up
a call when no line button was available.
Some features require you to have a
button free. Releasing calls can free up line
buttons.
Make calls first
The feature you tried to use requires you to
be on an active call at your telephone. This
display appears when information about a
call has been cleared by a system reset.
No free lines
All the lines or line pools available to the
telephone are in use. This display appears
when you have tried to dial an external
number or use a feature that conflicts with
the lines, line pools or prime line used by
the telephone. This must be corrected by
your customer service representative or
installer.
No line selected
The telephone has been set up to dial an
external number on a prime line but the
telephone does not have a prime line. This
must be corrected by your customer
service representative or installer.
In use:221
You have tried to program redirection while
someone else is programming redirection.
Only one person can program line
redirection at a time.
Incoming only
The line you are trying to use for redirecting
calls is for incoming calls only. Choose an
outgoing line.
9__
QUIT
BKSP
OK
Continue entering digits. Press √
or BKSP to delete incorrect digits. Press
≥ or OK when you are finished.
Invalid number
You have entered an invalid line pool code
or an invalid destination code.
Line denied
You have selected a line that is private to
another telephone.
Restricted call
The destination you have chosen for line
redirection is restricted.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Glossary
A
access code: Different sequences of
characters used to gain access to these
Norstar features: Line pools, Call park,
external lines, Direct-Dial telephone,
Auto DN, and DISA DN.
alarm code: A number that appears
on the alarm telephone display,
informing you that the ICS has detected
a fault in the system.
alarm telephone: A telephone that is
designated to receive reports of Norstar
system problems. This function is
usually assigned to a prime telephone,
but this can be changed under Feature
settings in Sys prgrammng.
Answer button: A telephone button
with an indicator that is used to monitor
another telephone. The answer button
indicates incoming calls destined for the
other telephone. Someone working at a
telephone with answer buttons (an
attendant, for example) can receive all
ringing and visual indication of
incoming calls for other telephones, and
answer those calls when necessary.
One telephone can have up to four
Answer buttons. An Answer button is
automatically assigned to a telephone
when that telephone is assigned an
Answer DN.
Answer DN: The internal or directory
number (DN) of a telephone that is
monitored by an Answer button. You
can assign up to four Answer DNs to a
telephone under Line Access in
Terminals and Sets programming.
causes the oldest entry to be deleted. If
Autobumping is off, your Norstar
system does not log calls when your log
is full.
autodial button: A memory button
that, if programmed, provides one-touch
dialing of external or internal numbers.
autolog options: ≤•°›
A feature that allows you to select the
type of calls that are stored in your Call
Log. You can choose to log calls that
were not answered by anyone within the
system, to log calls that were
unanswered at this telephone but which
were answered elsewhere in the system,
to log all calls answered and not
answered at this telephone, or to not
have calls automatically logged.
Automatic Dial: A feature that allows
you to dial without having to pick up the
receiver or select a line. You must have
a prime line to use Automatic Dial.
Automatic Dial is assigned under
Dialing options in Terminals&Sets
programming.
Automatic Handsfree: A feature
which automatically activates
Handsfree operation when you make or
answer a call. Automatic Handsfree is
assigned under Handsfree in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Automatic Hold: A feature that
automatically places an active call on
hold when you select another
line.Automatic Hold (Full AutoHold)
is assigned in Lines programming.
Automatic Privacy: See Privacy.
Autobumping: ≤°⁄fi
A feature that determines what the
system does with new Call Log items
when your Call Log is full. When
Autobumping is on, a new log entry
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
248 / Glossary
Automatic Daylight Savings
Time: A feature that switches the
system to standard or daylight savings
time at pre-programmed times. It is
turned on or off under Daylight time
in Sys prgrmmng.
Basic password: A one- to six-digit
password that prevents unauthorized
access to the most commonly-used
telephone settings. The Basic password
can be assigned and changed in
Passwords programming.
Automatic Telephone
Relocation: A feature that allows a
telephone to retain personal and system
programming when the telephone is
plugged into a different Norstar modular
jack. Automatic Telephone
Relocation is enabled under Set
relocation in Sys prgrmmng.
Business series terminals These
terminals were developed to replace the
Norstar M-series terminals. Therefore,
their functionality closely parallels the
M-series terminals.
auxiliary ringer: A separate external
telephone ringer or bell which can be
programmed to ring when a line or a
telephone rings. An auxiliary ringer may
be programmed to ring only when the
system is in a particular schedule.
Programming of an auxiliary ringer is
done in Services programming after
the feature has been enabled under
Capabilities in Terminals&Sets
programming.
B
Base station (XC 3.0 only): A
Companion component that is mounted
on walls and ceilings to provide a radio
link to an office or other area where
Companion portable telephones are
used. Each base station houses two
radios that allow portables to send and
receive calls through the ICS. (See also
Companion Wireless)
Background Music: A feature that
allows you to hear music from the
speaker of your Norstar telephone. It is
available only if a music source has
been attached to the ICS and the feature
has been enabled under Feature
settings in Sys prgrmmng.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
busy lamp field (BLF): A device
with a liquid crystal display (LCD)
panel of indicators that shows the status
of up to 24 telephones in the Norstar
system. The BLF attaches to the M7310
and T7316 telephones.
button caps: Interchangeable plastic
caps that fit over the buttons of Norstar
telephones. They are used to indicate the
features programmed onto each
programmable memory button. Button
caps are either pre-printed or have clear
windows that allow you to insert labels.
Button Inquiry: ≤•‚
With this feature you can check the
function of each programmable button
on your system telephone.
C
Call Duration timer: ≤‡‡
A feature that allows you to see how
long you spent on your last call, or how
long you have been on your present call.
Call Forward: ≤›
A feature that forwards all the calls
arriving at your telephone to another
telephone in your Norstar system. To
have calls forwarded outside the system,
use Line Redirection.
Call Forward No Answer: A feature
that forwards all calls arriving at your
telephone to another designated
telephone in your Norstar system after a
P0992640 02
Glossary / 249
specific number of rings. Call Forward
No Answer is assigned under
Capabilities in Terminals&Sets
programming.
The retrieval code appears on the
display of your telephone when you
park the call. You can park up to 25 calls
on the system at one time.
Call Forward On Busy: A feature
that forwards all calls at your telephone
to another designated telephone if your
telephone is busy. This feature is
assigned under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Call Park Callback: See Callback.
Call Forward Override: An
automatic system feature that allows
you to call someone and ask them to
stop forwarding their calls to you.
Call Information: ≤°⁄⁄
Call Information allows you to display
information about incoming calls. For
external calls, you can display the caller
name, telephone number and the line
name. For an internal call, you can
display the name of the caller and the
internal number. You can obtain
information about ringing, answered, or
held calls.
Call Log: ≤°⁄¤
Enter your Call Log to view a record of
incoming calls. The log could contain
the following information for each call:
sequence number in the Call Log, name
and number of caller, long distance
indication, indication if the call was
answered, time and date of the call,
number of repeated calls from the same
source, and name of the line that the call
came in on. See Autobumping, Autolog
options, and Call Log for further
information.
Call Park: ≤‡›
With this feature you can place a call on
hold so that someone can retrieve it
from any other telephone in the Norstar
system by selecting an internal line and
entering a retrieval code.
P0992640 02
Call Park prefix: The first digit of the
retrieval code of a parked call. This digit
cannot conflict with the first digit of any
existing DNs, Line Pool access codes,
the Direct-dial digit, or the external line
access code. The default Call Park
prefix digit is 1. It may be set to none, in
which case Call Park is disabled. Call
Park prefix is assigned under Access
codes in Sys prgrmmng.
Call Pickup Directed: ≤‡fl
A feature that allows you to answer a
call ringing at any system telephone by
entering the internal number of that
telephone before taking the call. Call
Pickup Directed is enabled under
Feature settings in Sys prgrmmng.
Call Pickup Group: See Pickup
Group.
Call Queuing: ≤°‚⁄
If you have several calls waiting at your
telephone, you can invoke the Call
Queuing feature to answer them in order
of priority. Priority is given to incoming
calls, followed by callback and camped
calls.
Callback: If you park, camp,
or transfer a call to another telephone
and it is not answered there, it will ring
again at your telephone. How long the
system will wait before Callback occurs
is set under Feature settings in Sys
prgrmmng.
Camp-on: ≤°¤
A feature that allows you to reroute a
call to a telephone even if all the lines on
that telephone are busy. To answer a
camped call, use Call Queuing or select
a line if the camped call appears on your
telephone. Priority is given to queued
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
250 / Glossary
calls. Note: Systems which use a
centralized voice mail system attached
to a Meridian 1, can provide this service
to all nodes of the network.
Companion Wireless provides mobility
in the workplace. Calls that used to ring
just at your Norstar set can also appear
and ring at your portable.
Camp timeout: The length of a delay
before a camped call is returned to the
telephone that camped the call. The
length of delay is set under Feature
settings in Sys prgrmmng.
Companion portable telephone:
Hand-held wireless sets which allow
complete mobility within the reach of
Companion base stations or an external
antenna. Portables offer many, but not
all, Norstar features and share much of
the same programming as wired desk
sets.
Central answering position
(CAP): An M7324 telephone that has
been designated as a CAP under CAP
assignment in Sys prgrmmng. The
CAP provides backup answering and
can be used to monitor the telephones
within a Norstar system.
Class of Service (COS): The set of
Norstar features and lines available to
the user for a call. The Class of Service
for a call is determined by the restriction
filters and remote access packages
assigned to the telephone in Lines
programming. The Class of Service for
a call can be changed by entering a sixdigit Class of Service password.
(Internal users cannot change their
access to features with a COS password,
only their restriction filters.) Class of
Service and Class of Service
passwords are assigned in Passwords
programming. See Remote Access.
Class of Service password:
≤fl°
A six-digit code that allows you to
switch from your current Class of
Service to one that allows you to dial
numbers prohibited by your current
Class of Service.
Companion Wireless: The name for
Nortel Networks communication
systems which use radio technology to
transmit and receive signals between its
components and the Norstar system.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Conference: ≤‹
A feature allows you to establish a
three-person call at your Norstar
telephone.
contrast adjustment: ≤•‡
Allows you to set the contrast level of
your telephone display.
control telephone: A control
telephone can place the lines for which
it has responsibility in or out of a
Service Mode.
The direct-dial telephone is a control
telephone for directing calls to the extra
direct-dial telephone. A telephone is
made a control telephone and has lines
assigned to it in Services programming.
Coordinated Dialing Plan: (CDP)
This dialing plan uses a steering code to
identify each node in a private network.
This one-digit code becomes part of the
set DN number rather than a separate
code. In this way, system A might have
codes in range 2100 to 2999, whereas
system B might have codes in range
3100 to 3999.
COS: See Class of Service.
cursor: A short horizontal line that
appears on the system telephone display
to indicate that characters can be entered
using the dialpad.
P0992640 02
Glossary / 251
D
data terminal: A device, such as a
modem, that can be used to transfer data
instead of sound over a telephone
network. You cannot use Norstar
programming to set up such devices.
See the documentation that
accompanies the device.
date: See Show Time or Time and
Date.
defaults: The settings for all Norstar
features when the system is first
installed. Settings are changed from
their defaults in programming. In this
manual, default settings are shown in
bold text.
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT) to
prime: After a specified number of
rings, this feature transfers an
unanswered call on an external line, to
the prime telephone associated with that
line. This feature is activated under
Feature settings in Sys prgrmmng.
destination code: A two- to sevendigit number that the system interprets
and then translates into the digits that
you want dialed out. Both the code and
its associated dialed digits are assigned
under Routing service in Services
programming.
dialing restriction: See Restriction
filter.
dialing modes: ≤•°¤
This feature allows you to set the dialing
mode of your telephone. Norstar
supports three dialing modes:
Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial, and Standard
Dial. All three modes support on-hook
dialing, meaning you can dial a call
without picking up the receiver. The
special features of the Automatic and
Pre-Dial modes are available only when
you dial on-hook.
P0992640 02
Direct-dial: A feature that allows you
to dial a designated telephone in your
Norstar system with a single digit, such
as the main receptionist. As many as
five direct dial sets can be established.
Each telephone in the system is assigned
to one direct-dial telephone. There is a
single, system wide digit for calling the
assigned direct-dial telephone of any
telephone. Direct-dial telephones are
established in System programming.
Telephones are assigned to a direct-dial
telephone under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Direct-dial #: A digit used systemwide to call the Direct-dial telephone.
The digit is assigned under Access
codes in Sys prgrmmng.
Direct-dial number: The digit used
to call the direct-dial telephone.
Direct inward system access
(DISA): The feature that allows remote
users to dial directly into the Norstar
system and use Norstar features. Callers
will hear stuttered dial tone and will be
required to enter a Class of Service
password to gain access to the system.
See Remote Access.
directed pickup: See Call Pickup
Directed.
Directory number (DN): A unique
number that is automatically assigned to
each telephone or data terminal. The
DN, also referred to as an internal
number, is often used to identify a
telephone when settings are assigned
during programming.
Default DN assignments start at 221.
DISA DN: The received number
assigned to the Norstar direct inward
system access facility. If a caller dials a
number that is assigned to the
DISA DN, the caller hears stuttered dial
tone and must enter a Class of Service
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
252 / Glossary
password. Once the password is
accepted, the caller hears system dial
tone and can use Remote Access
features. See Remote Access.
Disconnect Supervision: A setting
that enables the Norstar system to detect
if an external caller hangs up. Once an
external caller hangs up, the Norstar
system can disconnect its line.
Disconnect Supervision is enabled
under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
display: A liquid crystal display
(LCD) on the telephone that guides you
through feature operation and
programming.
display button: The Norstar M7310
telephone and M7324 telephone and the
Business Series Terminal T7316 are
each equipped with three buttons
located directly beneath the display.
During feature operation or
programming, some or all of these
buttons may be used to provide further
options. If an option is available, it is
shown in the bottom row of the two-row
display, directly above the
corresponding display button. Display
buttons are represented in this manual as
underlined capital, such as OK.
DN: See Directory number.
Do Not Disturb: ≤°fi
A feature that stops calls from ringing at
your telephone. Only Priority Calls will
ring at your telephone. A line button will
flash when you receive a call, but the
call will not ring.
DTMF: See Dual tone multifrequency.
dual tone multifrequency: Two
distinct telephone signaling tones used
for dialing.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
E
Emergency 911 dialing: The
capability to access a public emergency
response system by dialing the digits
9-1-1. State and local requirements for
support of Emergency 911 Dialing
service by Customer Premises
Equipment vary. Consult your local
telecommunications service provider
regarding compliance with applicable
laws and regulations.
emergency telephone: A single-line
telephone, also referred to as a 500/2500
telephone, that becomes active when
there is no power to the ICS.
evening schedule: See Schedules,
and Services.
event message: Event messages are
stored in the system log and displayed
during a Maintenance session. They
record a variety of events and activities
in the Norstar system.
exceptions: See Overrides.
external call: A call to a destination
outside the Norstar system.
External Call Forward: See Line
Redirection.
external code: The number you dial
to get an external line. By default it is 9,
but this can be changed under Access
codes in Sys prgrmmng. You do not
always need an external code. It is
primarily to support the M7100 and
T7100 telephones, and single-line
telephones using an Analog Terminal
Adapter.
external line: A line on your system
telephone used for making calls to
destinations outside the Norstar system.
external music source: See Music
source.
P0992640 02
Glossary / 253
external paging: A feature you can
use to make voice announcements over
an externally-mounted loudspeaker
connected to the ICS. The external
speaker is not a Norstar component and
must be supplied by the customer.
F
feature button: Many Norstar
features are invoked by pressing the
Feature (≤) button followed by a
feature code. The feature button is also
used to exit a feature.
feature code: A number that is used
to activate a particular feature.
Feature programming: ≤•‹
Allows you to program a feature code
onto a memory button.
Forward: See Call Forward.
Full Autohold (on idle line): When
this feature is on, if you select an
available line and then do something
that selects another line, the first line is
put on hold. Full Autohold is enabled
under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
Full Handsfree: See Handsfree.
G
Group Listening: ≤°‚¤
A feature that allows you to have others
in your office hear a caller through your
telephone speaker. The caller hears you
only when you speak into the receiver.
They cannot hear other people in the
office.
You can cancel Group Listen for the
current call. Group Listen is cancelled
automatically when you hang up the
Group Listen call.
H
Handsfree:
A feature you can use to make calls
without using the telephone receiver.
Full Handsfree is activated under
Capabilities in Terminals&Sets
programming. When it is activated, a
Handsfree/Mute button is automatically
assigned to the telephone.
Handsfree (HF) Answerback:
When activated, this feature
automatically turns on the microphone
at a telephone receiving a Voice Call so
that the person receiving the call can
respond without lifting the receiver. It is
activated under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Handsfree/Mute button: See
Handsfree.
Hardware: A section in programming
that shows what equipment has been
installed in the ICS. This section is
accessed by the installer.
headset: A head-mounted or
ear-mounted telephone receiver that is
used instead of the hand-held receiver.
Headsets are not Norstar components
and must be supplied by the customer.
Held (Line) Reminder: A system
telephone rings and displays the
message On hold: LINENAM when an
external call has been placed on hold for
a certain period of time. The Held Line
Reminder feature and Remind delay
are set under Feature settings in Sys
prgrmmng.
HF Answerback: See Handsfree
Answerback.
Hold button: ≥
This button is used to suspend calls so
that the person using the telephone can
perform another task without
disconnecting the caller.
Hook Switch Flash: See Link time.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
254 / Glossary
Host system signaling: (Also
referred to as end-to-end signaling.)
System telephones can access a remote
system or dial a number on an alternate
carrier by means of host feature
activation, such as Link, Pause and Run/
Stop.
Hospitality The Hospitality features
allow business which use hospitality
telephones, or room-based telephones,
to control access, alarms, and
maintenance duties through the
telephones.
Hotline: This feature automatically
calls a pre-assigned number when the
telephone receiver is lifted or the
Handsfree/Mute button is pressed. A
Hotline number can be an internal or
external number. Hotline is assigned
under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Hunt group: The hunt groups feature
allows a group of sets to be called by a
single directory number ensuring that
calls are easily routed to the appropriate
group.
I
I/C: An abbreviation of intercom.
ICS (integrated communication
system): The central hardware
component in the Norstar system. The
ICS has its own processor and memory,
and provides a physical point of
connection for the various types of
devices, telephones, and expansion
modules used in Norstar.
The ICS can function on its own as a
basic system (with 32 system telephones
and up to 48 external lines), or with the
addition of Trunk Modules (TM) that
supports more external lines, or Station
Modules (SM) that support more system
telephones.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN): A digital telephone
service that allows for a combination
voice and data connection over a single,
high-speed connection. ISDN service
can operate over the same copper
twisted-pair telephone line as analog
telephone service.
intercom button: A button that
provides access to internal lines used for
calls within a Norstar system and access
to external lines through a line pool or
external code. A telephone may be
assigned zero to eight Intercom buttons.
This is done under Line access in
Terminals&Sets programming.
intercom keys: See Intercom button.
internal line: A line on your telephone
dedicated to making calls to destinations
inside your Norstar system. An internal
line may still connect you with an
external caller if you use it to access a
line pool or to pick up a call using
Norstar call handling features such as
Call Park or Call Pickup Directed.
internal number: A number, also
referred to as a Directory Number or
DN, that identifies a Norstar telephone
or device.
internal user: Someone using a
system telephone within a Norstar
system.
ISDN: See integrated services digital
network.
ISDN DN: A directory number (DN)
used by ISDN terminal equipment
connected to the ICS. The system uses a
maximum of thirty ISDN DNs.
L
Last Number Redial: ≤fi
A feature that allows you to redial the
last external number you dialed.
P0992640 02
Glossary / 255
Fixed line:
A telecommunications line between two
service points leased from a
communications carrier for private use,
usually incurring a monthly service rate.
Fixed lines setting is used solely by data
modules.
This feature differs from Call Forward
in two ways: It redirects only external
calls, not internal calls, and it redirects
calls to destinations outside the system.
Call forward redirects calls only to
destinations inside the Norstar system.
See Call Forward.
Least cost routing: See Routing
service.
Link: ≤‡⁄
If your Norstar system is connected to a
Private Branch Exchange (PBX), you
can use a Link signal to access special
features. The Link signal can also be
included as part of a longer stored
sequence on an External Autodial
button or in a Speed Dial code. The Link
symbol (¤) uses two of the 24 spaces
in a dialing sequence.
line: The complete path of a voice or
data connection between one telephone
(or other device) and another.
Lines: A programming section that
allows you to assign settings to each
trunk and external line. Lines
programming can be done by an
Installer or a System Coordinator Plus.
A System Coordinator can program the
name of a line.
Line number: A number that
identifies an external line. The total
number of lines depends on how many
Trunk Modules are installed.
Line Pool: ≤fl›
A group of lines used for making
external calls. Line pools provide an
efficient way of giving a telephone
access to external lines without taking
up many line buttons. A line is assigned
to be part of a line pool under Trunk/
Line data in Lines programming.
Line Redirection: ≤°›
A feature that allows you to redirect all
calls on an incoming line to a
destination outside the Norstar system.
Once a line is redirected it cannot be
answered within the Norstar system.
The system may be set up to give a brief
ring when a call comes in on a redirected
line, under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
P0992640 02
Long Tones: ≤°‚°
A feature that allows you to control the
length of a tone so that you can signal
devices such as fax or answering
machines which require tones longer
than the standard 120 milliseconds.
Lunch schedule: See Schedules,
and Services.
M
M7000 telephone This telephone has
a no display. It does have four memory
buttons. (Note this telephone is only
supported on systems running Profile 2,
3, or 4).
M7100 telephone: A telephone with
a single line display and one
programmable memory button without
an indicator.
M7208 telephone: A telephone with
a single-line display and eight
programmable memory buttons with
indicators.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
256 / Glossary
M7310 telephone: A telephone that
has a two-line display, three display
buttons, 10 programmable memory
buttons with indicators, and 12 dual
memory programmable buttons without
indicators. An M7310 can be equipped
with a Busy Lamp Field.
M7324 telephone: A telephone with
a two-line display, three display buttons,
and 24 programmable memory buttons
with indicators. An M7324 telephone
can be equipped with a CAP module.
Malicious Caller ID (MCID) This
feature is a European ETSI-based
network feature that allows a user to use
≤°·‡ record the caller
information at the service provider.
memory buttons: Buttons that can be
programmed to dial frequently used
features or numbers automatically. See
M7100/T7100, M7208/T7208, M7310,
T7316, and M7324 telephone entries for
their exact memory button
configurations.
message: A feature that allows you to
send a message to another Norstar user.
The Message feature also allows you to
know if you have any messages waiting
and maintains a Message Waiting List to
keep a record of your internal messages
and your (external) voice mail
messages.
Message Waiting Indicator: PRI
lines can provide the signal that cause
the set to display a message-waiting
message, or light a lamp on the set to
indicate a voice message.
Monitoring See Silent Monitoring.
Move Line buttons: ≤•°⁄
A feature that allows you to move
assigned lines to different buttons (with
indicators) on your telephone.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Music source: A radio or other
source of music can be connected to the
Integrated Communication System to
provide music for the Music on Hold
and Background Music features. A
music source is not part of the Norstar
system and must be supplied by the
customer.
N
Names: Names can be assigned to
System Speed Dial numbers, external
lines, telephones, and service schedules.
This is done in programming. You can
use up to 16 characters to name a
System Speed Dial number, and seven
characters to name a telephone, line, or
schedule. If a Name has not been
assigned, the line number or DN will
appear on the display instead of a name.
Network DN: A number supplied by
the ISDN network service provider for
ISDN terminal equipment.
Night schedule: See Schedules, and
Services.
O
On hold: A setting, programmed
under Feature settings in Sys
prgrmmng, that controls whether
external callers hear music, periodic
tones, or silence when they are placed
on hold.
overlay: See Programming overlay.
overflow: A setting in Routing
Service that allows users to decide
what path an outgoing call will take if all
the lines used in a particular route are in
use when the call is made.
Overrides: One component of a
restriction filter. Overrides are numbers
you can dial even if they are forbidden
by a more general restriction. See
Restrictions.
P0992640 02
Glossary / 257
P
Page: ≤fl‚
A feature you can use to make
announcements over the Norstar
system. You can make page
announcements over the telephone
speakers and/or external speakers.
Page Time out: A setting that
controls how long a Page
Announcement can last. It can be
assigned under Feature settings in
Sys prgrmmng.
Page zone: An area in the office that
receives internal page announcements
independently of the rest of the office.
Each page zone is identified by a
number. Telephones are assigned to
page zones under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Park prefix: See Call park prefix.
Park timeout: The time before an
unanswered parked call is routed back to
the telephone that parked it. Park
timeout is configured under Feature
settings in Sys prgrmmng.
Password: A password is a specific
sequence of digits that you enter to gain
access to Norstar programming, to
override dialing restrictions, or to use
remote access with DISA.
Passwords: A programming section
that allows you to assign or change COS
passwords, Call log passwords, or any
of the programming passwords. Under
Passwords programming, you can only
modify the passwords for your level of
programming.
Pause: ≤‡°
A feature that enters a 1.5-second delay
in a dialing sequence on an external line.
This is often required for signaling
remote devices, such as answering
machines, or when reaching through to
PBX features or host systems. The
P0992640 02
Pause symbol (›) uses one of the 24
spaces in a dialing sequence. For pulse
dialing, • inserts a 1.5 second pause
into the dialing sequence.
PBX: private branch exchange.
Pickup Group: ≤‡fi
A telephone can be placed into one of
nine call pickup groups. A call ringing at
a telephone within a pickup group can
be picked up at any other telephone
within the same pickup group. A
telephone is assigned to a pickup group
under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Pool: See Line pool.
portable telephone: See Companion
portable telephone
Pre-dial: A feature that allows you to
enter a number and check it on your
telephone display before it is actually
dialed. If the number is incorrect, you
can edit it. The number is dialed only
when you pick up the receiver or select
a line.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI): An
ISDN interface which uses
23 B channels and a D channel
(23B+D).
Prime line: The line on your
telephone that is automatically selected
when you lift the receiver, press the
Handsfree/Mute button or use an
external dialing feature.
A Prime Line is assigned to a telephone
under Line access in Terminals&Sets
programming.
Prime Set (prime telephone): A
telephone that provides backup
answering for incoming calls on
external lines. The prime telephone for a
line will ring for any unanswered calls
on that line. A prime telephone is
assigned to a line under Trunk/Line
data in Lines programming.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
258 / Glossary
Priority Call: ≤fl·
If you get a busy signal when you call
someone in your office, you can
interrupt them for an urgent call. This
feature is enabled for a telephone under
Capabilities in Terminals&Sets
programming.
Privacy: This feature determines
whether a Norstar user may select a line
in use at another telephone and join an
established call. Privacy is enabled
under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming, but can be turned on and
off by users during individual calls.
Private line: See Private to.
Private Monitoring This feature
allows a user with a two-line display
telephone that has been designated as a
supervisor telephone, to monitor Hunt
group calls from external sources using
≤•¤fifi.
Private network: A telephone
network consisting of owned or leased
telephone lines used to connect different
offices of an organization independently
of the public network.
Private Network Identifier (PNI)
this is an identifying digit or set of digits
assigned to each system in a private
network with a Meridian system. These
codes are provided by the Meridian
system administrator when the node is
brought on to the network.
Private to: Allows you to select the
telephone that will use the line
exclusively. The line cannot appear on
any other telephone, except the prime
telephone for that line. Private lines
cannot be placed into line pools.
Private lines are assigned under
Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
Programmed release:
≤•°· A feature that performs
the function of the ® button in a
programmed dialing sequence.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
programming: Setting the way the
Norstar system will work. Programming
includes system-wide settings and
individual telephone and line settings.
programming overlay: A paper
template that is placed over the four
memory buttons with indicators on the
M7310, T7316 or M7324 telephone
during programming. The overlay labels
indicate the special function that each of
the four buttons takes on in
programming.
public line: An external line that can
be assigned to any telephone and to
many telephones. A line is assigned as
Public under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
public network: The regular
telephone network that connects most
homes and businesses.
Public Safety Answering Point
(PSAP): This is the first point of
contact a caller reaches after dialing
911.
pulse/tone dialing: An external line
setting for pulse or tone dialing. Pulse is
the traditional method of dialing used by
rotary-dial or push- button single-line
telephones. Tone dialing allows
telephones to communicate with other
devices such as answering machines.
Tone dialing is required to access the
features that PBX systems may offer or
to use another Norstar system remotely.
R
recall: See Link time.
receiver: The handset of a telephone.
receiver card: An abbreviated list of
system feature codes that is stored under
the telephone receiver. The card is
found on a perforated sheet that comes
with a system telephone.
P0992640 02
Glossary / 259
Remind delay: A feature that causes a
telephone to beep and display the
message On hold: LINENAM when a call
has been on hold for a programmable
period of time. This period is the
Remind delay.
Remote access: The ability to dial
into a Norstar system from outside the
system and make use of selected Norstar
features. The lines, features, and dialing
capabilities available to a remote user
are determined by the Class of Service.
If the remote access line is answered
with DISA, the user must enter a Class
of Service password to gain access to
the Norstar system features.
remote access dial restriction:
See Remote restriction.
Remote capability: A subset of
Norstar features that are available to
users connected through remote access.
Remote monitoring: A feature that
allows an off-site technician with a PC
call in and troubleshoot your system
through the built-in modem.
Remote paging: This feature allows
remote users to use the Norstar paging
feature. Access to this feature is
governed by the Class of Service for the
call. See Remote Access and Class of
Service.
Remote restriction: A restriction
filter applied to a line in order to control
which digits can be dialed during an
incoming remote access call. It is the
equivalent of a set filter for a remote
user.
remote user: Someone who calls into
a Norstar system from a telephone
outside that system and uses Norstar
features or lines. See Remote Access.
Restriction filter: Through a
combination of restrictions and
overrides, restriction filters prevent
certain telephone numbers or feature
P0992640 02
codes from being dialed. Restriction
filters can be applied to lines, sets,
specific lines on a set, and to Class of
Service passwords. The Norstar system
can handle up to 100 restriction filters.
Restriction service: A Services
section that allows you to assign
alternate dialing filters to lines,
telephones, lines on a particular
telephone, and alternate remote filters to
lines at specified times of the day and on
specified days.
restrictions: One component of a
Dialing filter. Restrictions are numbers
you cannot dial when that dialing filter
is in effect. See Exceptions.
Ring Again: ≤¤
A feature that can be used when you
can't get through to someone on your
Norstar system because their telephone
is busy or there is no answer. Ring
Again instructs the Norstar system to
inform you when they hang up or next
use their telephone.
ring group: A setting under Services
that allows you to assign a number of
different telephones to ring during one
of the schedules.Up to 20 ring groups
can be programmed by an installer or a
system coordinator plus.
ring type: ≤•fl
A feature that allows you to select one of
four distinctive rings for your telephone.
ring volume: ≤•°‚
A feature that allows you to set the
volume at which your telephone rings.
ringing service: A Services section
that allows you to make additional
telephones ring at specified times of the
day and on specified days.
Release button: Ends a call in the
same way that hanging up the receiver
does. The Release button may also be
used to end programming, Maintenance
sessions, and feature operations.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
260 / Glossary
Routing: See Routing service.
Routing service: A programming
section that allows outgoing calls to be
directed automatically based on the
numbers a caller dials. For Norstar
systems linked in a network, routing can
create a transparent or coordinated
dialing plan. It can also be used to direct
calls to the least expensive lines
according to a Services schedule
(sometimes called least cost routing).
Run/Stop: ≤•·
A feature that creates a break point in a
programmed external dialing sequence.
When you press a programmed key, the
system dials the number up to the run/
stop. When you press it again, the
system dials the digits following the run/
stop.
S
Saved Number Redial: ≤fl‡
A feature that allows you to save the
number of the external call you are on
(providing you dialed the call) so that
you can call it again later.
Schedules: Any of six different sets
of services that can be applied to your
Norstar system. A schedule can be
activated manually from a control
telephone or activated automatically at
specified times. See also Services.
Selective line redirection: See Line
Redirection.
Service modes See Services.
Service Profile Identifier: See
SPID.
Services: A programming section
that allows you to assign which
telephones ring, which restrictions
apply, and which call routing is used
during any of six different schedules.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
There are three services: Ringing
service, Restriction service and Routing
service, all found in Services
programming.
set: A telephone.
Set Copy: A programming section
that allows you to copy programmable
settings from one telephone to another
of the same type. Set Copy provides two
options: duplicating System Data and
User Data, or duplicating System Data
only. Set Copy does not provide the
same copy capability as COPY, which is
more selective of the settings that can be
duplicated.
Set filter: See Restriction filter.
Set lock (telephone lock): This
feature allows you to limit the number
of features that may be used or
programmed at a telephone. Full set
lock allows very few changes or
features, Partial set lock allows some
changes and features, and No set lock
allows any change to be made and any
feature to be used. Set lock is assigned
under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets
programming.
Set relocation: See Automatic
Telephone Relocation.
shift button: A small triangular
button beside the dual memory buttons
on the upper half of the M7310
telephone. You press the shift button to
store or access features on the top half of
the dual memory buttons.
Show Time: ≤°‚‹
While on a call, accessing this feature
allows you to see the current date and
time on the Norstar telephone display.
Startup programming: When a
Norstar system is first installed and
powered up, Startup programming must
be performed before any programming
can be done. Startup initializes the
system programming to defaults.
P0992640 02
Glossary / 261
Station: An individual telephone or
other Norstar device.
System coordinator: The person
responsible for customizing the Norstar
system through programming and for
helping co-workers use the Norstar
system.
System coordinator password: A
one- to six-digit password that prevents
unauthorized access to programming.
The System coordinator password can
be assigned and changed in Passwords
programming.
System coordinator plus: A
system coordinator who also performs
technical and maintenance functions for
the Norstar system.
System coordinator plus
password: A one- to six-digit
password that prevents unauthorized
access to programming. The System
coordinator plus password can be
assigned and changed in Passwords
programming.
System coordinator
programming: The programming
settings that are most commonly
changed once the Norstar system is
installed.
Press ≤ ••Ç؈ÏÈÌ,
then ÅΘȈ to access System
coordinator programming.
system data: An option in the Set
Copy function. System Data refers to
the programmable system settings that
apply to all telephones and lines.
System programming: A
programming section that allows you to
assign and maintain certain settings on
the Norstar system. System
programming is performed by an
installer or system coordinator plus.
P0992640 02
System speed dial code: A threedigit code (001 to 255) that can be
programmed to dial a telephone number
up to 24 digits long. System speed dial
codes are programmed for the entire
Norstar system under the System Speed
programming heading.
System ID: The System ID (or System
Security number) can be accessed on
any programming telephone display by
pressing ≤••ÍÁÍÈÎ, or
≤••‡·‡›‹.
System-wide Call Appearance
(SWCA) keys ≤•fi¤‚ to
≤•fi‹fi These 16 feature
codes can be assigned to buttons with
indicators on a group of telephones to
provide call appearance for incoming
calls that can be answered by any
telephone in the group. At the same
time, the indicator displays the current
status of the call.
T
T7000 telephone This telephone has
a no display. It does have four memory
buttons. This telephone functions in the
same way as the M7000 telephone.
(Note this telephone is only supported
on systems running Profile 2, 3, or 4).
T7100 Business Series Terminal:
A telephone with a single line display
and one programmable memory button
without an indicator.
T7208 Business Series Terminal:
A telephone with a single-line display
and eight programmable memory
buttons with indicators.
T7316 Business Series Terminal:
A telephone that has a two-line display,
three display buttons, 16 programmable
memory buttons with indicators, and 12
memory programmable buttons without
indicators.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
262 / Glossary
T7406 telephone: This portable
handset functions very similarly to the
T7310 telephone. Functions and
installation are all described in separate
documentation specific to the telephone.
Target lines: Lines used to answer
incoming calls only. A target line routes
a call according to digits it receives from
an incoming trunk. They are referred to
by line numbers in the same way as
physical lines.
Telco features: A programming
section that allows you to specify the
external telephone numbers that are
dialed by the Message feature to retrieve
voice messages, or to set up CLASS
(CMS) services for lines and sets. Telco
features are accessed by an installer or a
system coordinator plus.
Terminal equipment (TE): A
generic term for devices that connect to
an ISDN network. Examples of ISDN
TE are ISDN telephones, computers
equipped with ISDN cards and video
terminals.
Terminals and Sets: A
programming section that allows you to
assign and change settings that apply to
the telephones and other devices
connected to the Norstar system.
Terminals and Sets programming is
performed by an installer or a system
coordinator.
Time and date: A programming
section that allows you to manually
change time or date. The time and date
can also be changed by pressing
••ÊȘ‰ and entering the
Basic password or one of the
programming passwords.
Transfer: ≤‡‚
A feature that allows you to redirect a
call to another telephone in your Norstar
system, over a network or outside your
Norstar system.
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Transfer Callback: If a transferred
call is not answered after a specific
number of rings, the call will return to
the telephone that made the transfer.
The number of rings is assigned under
Feature settings in System
programming. Transfer Callback does
not apply to calls transferred externally.
Trunk: The physical connection
between the Norstar system and the
outside world using either the public
telephone system or a private network.
Trunk Answer: ≤°‚‚
A feature you can use to answer a call on
any line that has an active Ringing
service Service Mode, even if that line
does not appear on your telephone.
Trunk Answer is enabled in Services
programming.
U
Uniform Dialing Plan: (UDP) This
type of dialing plan uses a location code
to identify each node on a private
network. Dialing sequence: (destination
code)+(location code)+DN.
User Data: User Data is an option in
the Set Copy feature. User Data refers to
the personal settings that are unique to
an individual telephone, and are not
programmed for the system. User Data
is programmed at each telephone.
These settings, for example, include
user Speed Dial and the assignment of
programmable memory buttons.
User Filter: See Restriction filter.
User Preferences: a programming
section that allows you to assign
autodialers, user speed dial codes,
display contrast, and other settings to a
specific telephone or person. You do not
have to program these settings at the
person’s telephone. User preferences
are assigned in Terminals and Sets
programming.
P0992640 02
Glossary / 263
User Speed Dial:
≤•›
Three-digit codes (256-279) can be
programmed to dial external telephone
numbers. User Speed Dial numbers are
programmed for each telephone, and
can be used only at the telephone on
which they are programmed.
V
Voice Call: ≤flfl
A feature you can use to make an
announcement or begin a conversation
through the speaker of another
telephone in the Norstar system. The
telephone you call will not ring. Instead,
the person you call will hear a beep and
then your voice. Their telephone will
beep periodically to remind them that
their microphone is open.
Voice Call deny: ≤°°
A feature that prevents your telephone
from receiving Voice Calls.
Voice message center: If you have
subscribed to Call Display services you
can receive visual Voice Message
Waiting Indication, providing your
telephone has a display. If you have
Voice Message Waiting Indication, you
can program the telephone numbers
required to access up to five different
Voice Message Centers. You can also
program which of the five Centers is to
be accessed by each specific line.
W
Wait for dial tone: ≤°‚›
A feature that causes of sequence of
numbers to pause until dial tone is
present on the line before continuing to
dial. The Wait for dial tone symbol (‡)
uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence. This feature requires a
Services or Combo Cartridge.
wireless: See Companion.
P0992640 02
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
264 / Glossary
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Index
Symbols
§ Long Distance symbol 243
≤
Autobumping
canceling (#815) 128
enable (815) 128
autodial button
external (*1) 79
internal (*2) 79
autodial button, external (*0) 82
Background Music
canceling (#86) 191
turning on (86) 191
Button Inquiry (*0) 86, 234, 240
Call Forward
canceling (#4) 103
using (4) 103
Call Information (811) 49
Call Log
entering (812) 130
options (*84) 127
password (*85) 130, 131
viewing (812) 128
Call Park (74) 96
Call Pickup (75) 53
Call Queuing (801) 90
Call Transfer
canceling (#70) 93
using (70) 59, 91
Camp-on (82) 94
Class of Service (68) 230
Conference Call
7100 sets (#3) 58
on Hold, 7100 sets (#3) 59
using (3) 57
Contrast Adjustment (*7) 135
Dialing Modes (*82) 72
Directed Pickup (76) 52
Do Not Disturb
canceling (#85) 190
turning on (85) 74, 190
Exclusive Hold (79) 89
Feature Button, programming (*3)
136
Group Listening
P0992640 02
canceling (#802) 60
using (802) 60
Hide message display (806) 149
Host System Dialing Signals
Link (71) 221
Long Tones (808) 223
Pause (78) 223
Programmed Release (*89) 224
Run/Stop (*9) 224
Wait for Dial Tone (804) 225
Last Number Redial (5) 82
Line Pool Access (64) 71
Line Redirection
canceling (#84) 109
using (84) 108
Message
canceling (#1) 119
sending (1) 118
viewing (65) 119
Page
combined zone (63) 114
external zone (62) 114
internal zone (61) 114
using (60) 96
Password
Basic 22, 211
Call Log (*85) 130, 131
System Coordinator 29, 36, 38
System Coordinator (ADMIN) 26,
211
Priority Call (69) 74
Privacy (83) 66
Restriction Service
turning off (#872) 207
turning on (872) 207
Ring Again
canceling (#2) 76
using (2) 76
Ring Type (*6) 148
Ring Volume (*80) 149
Ringing Service
turning off (#871) 207
turning on (871) 207
Routing Service
turning off (#873) 207
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
266 / Index
turning on (873) 207
Services, viewing (870) 209
Speed Dial
adding user (*4) 84
making calls (0) 84
Static Time and Date (806) 123
Testing
display (805) 240
power supply (805) 242
telephone buttons (805) 241
telephone handset (805) 241
telephone headset (805) 241
telephone speaker (805) 242
Time (803) 67
Time and Date (**TIME) 29, 212
Trunk Answer (800) 55
User Preferences (**USER) 151, 212
Voice Call (66) 123
Voice Call Deny
canceling (#88) 124
using (88) 124
ð
Page
using (60) 114
¤ Link symbol 221
› Pause symbol 223
fi Programmed Release symbol 224
fl Run/Stop symbol 225
‡ Wait for Dial Tone symbol 225
2-way DID
PRI 194
7100 set
Call Park 96
7100 sets
CallBack 95
camping a call 95
Line Redirection 108
Ring Again 244
transferring a call 93
911
description 13
911 service 189
compliance 194
maintaining records 194
A
access
change COS password 230
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
dialtone for remote calls 229
external lines 235
fast busy tone for remote calls 229
from outside the system 226
remote access tones 229
stuttered dial tone for remote access
229
using a COS 227
using a DISA 227
Access denied 243
accidental release 67
active services, display indicator 210
ADD 238
adjusting the display 135
administration password (see System
Coordinator password)
administration programming 14
administration set
controlling alarms 181
hospitality 173
using 179
alarm
cancel 183
Hospitality 180
turn off 183
using 182
Alarm 61-4-2 239
alarm number, recording 239
alarm telephone, description 239
alarms
controlling with admin set 181
query on admin set 181
reporting and recording codes 239
all lines, redirection 108
Allow calls 190
allow redirect
programming 109
Already joined 54, 69
Already parked 97
alternate services 204
analog telephone
answering a message 118
delaying snooze alarm 183
removing a message 121
replying to a message 120
sending messages 117
setting room, Hospitality 179
turn off alarm 183
using wake-up alarms 182
P0992640 02
Index / 267
analog terminal adapter (see ATA)
announcement
paging 114
Voice Call 123
answer
programming Handsfree answerback
64
Trunk answer 55
answer button
assigning to sets 147
attendant 56
type 56
using 55
answering calls
Answer button 55
Call Display services 49
Call Duration Timer 66
Call Pickup 52
CAP 47
Conference Calls 57
directed pickup 52
distinctive ring patterns 45
ending a call 48
Group Listening 60
group pickup 53
Handsfree 61
hearing aid compatibility 49
line indicators 44
prime telephone 46
Privacy 65
several Hold calls 88
Trunk Answer 55
using line buttons 44
using SWCA keys 98
Voice Call 124
answering incoming calls
hunt groups 43
apply button labels 138
assign an alarm time 181
assign lines
Hunt Groups 161
sets 234
ATA
dialing signals 223
using dialing modes 73
attendant answer button 56
Auto Call information (see Caller ID set)
auto hold
SWCA keys 99
P0992640 02
auto-answer, using COS password 230
autobumping, enable/disable 128
autodial
button inquiry 134
choosing a line 80
for M7100 and T7100 80
line pool access code 80
line selection 80
programming 79
set lock 219
storing number on a memory button
79
using intercom line for 80
using Last Number Redial 83
Autodial full 80
automatic
Call information 51
Call Log 126
dial 73
Handsfree 64
Hold 88
logging calls 131
release of a line, see Disconnect
Supervision
restriction service 205
automatic call back, ISDN terminal feature
200
Automatic Call Forward, changing settings
104
automatic recall, ISDN terminal feature
200
automatic telephone relocation 189
auxiliary ringer, programming 220
B
background music
licensing 191
set lock 219
turning off 191
using 191
Basic
password 14, 151
password, changing 211
Restriction and Routing service 207
basic
answer button 56
call restrictions 177
BKSP 238
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
268 / Index
blocking
calls, see Do Not Disturb and DND
name and number 194
break point, host system dialing, Run/Stop
224
BRI
ISDN description 192
ISDN services 196
Name and Number Blocking 199
network features 198
Network Name Display 198
broadcast, Hunt Groups, programming
163
business name
features 198
name display, outgoing 193
Business Series Terminal
programming overlay 20
Business Series Terminals
Handsfree 61
installing 185
viewing line profile 232
viewing set profile 232
wall mounting sets 186
busy
call forward on busy 105
DND on busy 106
Do Not Disturb 39
Hunt Group line setting 165
Hunt Group routing 165
priority call 74
programming call forward 38
tone, remote access 229
busy 68, 76
busy tone
Hunt Group routing 165
button caps
clear 139
pre-printed, colored 139
button defaults
M7100/T7100 146
M7208 and T7208 145
M7310 142
M7310 dual memory buttons 142
M7310 lower buttons 143
M7324 telephone 144
T7316 Business Series Terminal 140
Button erased 81
Button Inquiry 134
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
buttons
Answer button 55
asssign handsfree and mute 64
Button Inquiry 134
CAP 47
changing programming 152
changing user speed dials 153
default assingment 139
dialpad 17
display 17, 19
erasing programmed features 136
Feature 17, 18
handsfree 18
Hold 17, 18
labels, applying 138
Last Number Redial 82
line button assignment 234
line button indicators 235
line pool feature code 235
memory 17, 79, 237
moving line 147
mute 18
numbering on all telephone types 152
programming features on 136
Release 17, 18, 48
Saved Number Redial 86
testing 240, 241
using a line button 70
using buttons 16
volume control 18
bypassing a Hotline telephone 217
C
call
disconnecting, conference call 57
ending a call 48
independent hold, on conference 58
overflow 236
redial last number 82
Call 221? 244
Call blocked 75
call blocking, turning privacy on 66
Call by Call
FX calls 195
Inwats calls 195
Outwats calls 195
PRI 195
Private calls, DID and DOD 195
P0992640 02
Index / 269
Public calls, DID and DOD 195
see also CbC 195
Tie calls 195
call display, answering calls 49
Call Duration Timer 66
Call Forward
All Calls, set lock 219
All Calls,ISDN terminals 197
automatic, changing settings 104
Call Forward No Answer 37
Call Forward on Busy 38, 105
calling the number 200
cancel 200
canceling 103
change delay 105
Forward no answer 104
line redirection differences 112
No Answer, line redirection 105
overriding 104
programming 36, 104, 105
programming, no answer 36
service provider 199
to voice mail 107
using 103
call indicators 43
call information
changing what is shown first 51
displaying 50
displaying information 49
for specific call 49
getting information for a call on hold
51
service provider 126
Call Log
autobumping, enable/disable 128
automatic 126
automatic logging 131
calling from within 129
clearning password 213
erasing items 129
logging a call manually 127
options 127
options, changing 154
password 130–131
canceling 131
changing 130
set 126
using 126
viewing 128
P0992640 02
Call Park
description 96
picking up calls 234
retrieval codes 96
Call Pickup
Directed Pickup 52
message forwarded 118
picking up calls 234
Call Queuing
7100 series sets 244
using 90
call restrictions, Hospitality, rooms 176
Call traced 201
Call Transfer 91–94
call transfer
cancelling 93
external calls 92
using 91
Call(s) bumped 132
Callback, using 102
Caller ID set, automatic call information 51
Calling 76
calling party name 193
calls
accidental release 67
allow line redirection programming
109
answering calls on CAP 47
answering prime telephone 46
answering with direct pickup 52
answering with group pickup 53
answering with Handsfree 61
automatic dial 73
automatic display 51
automatic Hold 88
blocking the Link feature 222
call queuing 90
cancelling call forward 103
cancelling DND 190
changing Call forward no answer
104
changing how you dial 72
changing to Handsfree 62
checking duration 66
display call information 50
display call information for hold call
51
external call transfer 92
forwarding to internal set 103
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
270 / Index
forwarding to voice mail 107
from within Call Log 129
holding several calls 88
listening while on Hold 89
making a private call 66
making from ISDN terminal 72
monitoring with CAP 48
muting Handsfree 62
overriding call foward 104
programming 2-way DID 194
programming paging 115
putting on Exclusive hold 75
refusing second call 190
restriction services 204
retrieving a parked call 96
retrieving held call 88
routing outgoing calls 205
saved number redial 86
security on remote access 227
specific call information 49
standard dial 73
tracking incoming calls 126
using answer button 55
using DND 190
using Do Not Disturb 190
using line button 44
using Link for external calls 221
using Pause for external calls 223
using pre-dial 73
using ring again 76
using speed dial 84
ways to make a 68
Camp denied 95
Camp max 95
Camp to 95
Camped 95, 244
camping calls (see Camp-on)
camp-on
tones 94
using 94
Can't ring again 69, 77
CANCEL 238
cancel
a transfer 93
Call Forward 103
call log password 131
Do Not Disturb 190
group listening 60
Hospitality alarm 183
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Line Redirection 109
pending alarm 181
sent message 119
voice call 124
Cancel denied 122
CANCL 153
CAP
answering calls 47
customizing 47
DID 47
monitoring calls 48
moving buttons 148
prime telephone 47
sending messages 117
telephone 47
telephone, direct dial 215
using 47
central answering position (see CAP)
centrex template
M7208 145
M7310 lower buttons 143
M7324 buttons 145
T7208 145
T7316 buttons 141
CHANGE 153
change
alarm time 181
automatic Call Forward 104
call log options 154
call log password 130
COS password 230
day 30
dial method 72
display contrast 155
hour 30
how calls are dialed 154
Hunt Group Name 168
language on display 155
line name 35
minutes 30
month 30
ring type 148, 155
user speed dial 153
year 30
choosing a line 70
Class of Service
changing 230
managing passwords 230
using a password 230
P0992640 02
Index / 271
clear button caps 139
Cleared>LINENAM 122
clock, set 31
CLR 153
code, system speed dial 31
colored button caps 139
common set, Hospitality 173
communicating in the office
paging 114–117
sending messages using display 117
Companion, Registration password 212
cond pswd, Hospitality 174
cond pswd, programming 214
condition, setting room condition 178
Conf. on hold 60
Conference busy 60
conference call
by releasing privacy 66
cancel group listening 60
conference on Hold 58
disconnecting from 59
disconnecting one call 57
group listening 60
independent Hold 58
making 57
no privacy button 65
releasing privacy 57
removing yourself from 59
splitting 59
using the Conference feature 57
connecting to ISDN network 202
contrast adjustment 135
control
calls, using alternate or scheduled
services 204
system security on remote calls 227
using DISA 227
control telephone
enter Service feature code 207
setting service schedules 218
turn service off 208
turning services off/on 204
viewing active services 208
custom programming, moving sets 189
customizing CAP 47
customizing your telephone
adjusting ring volume 149
Button Inquiry 134
changing ring type 148
P0992640 02
contrast adjustment 135
User Preferences 151
D
data transfer, PRI 192
date and time
changing 29
displayed instead of messages 149
displaying 67
length of a call 66
date, change 212
day, set 30
default buttons
assignment 139
defaults
button assignments 139
buttons, T7316 Business Series
Terminal 140
M7310 buttons 142
M7310 dual memory buttons 142
M7310 lower memory buttons 143
delay
call forward no answer 105
hunt 164
Delayed Ring Transfer 190
delete
Call Log items 128
call log password 131
messages from list 121
programmed features 136
Denied in admin 243
deny voice call 124
desk information, Hospitality 175
desk pswd 214
Desk pswd, programming 173
desktop conferencing, ISDN applications
202
destination code
line for external calls 218
dial tone, stuttered 229
Dial voice call 125
dialing
911 compliance 194
automatic dial 73
host system signals 221
modes 72
options 154
pre-dial 73
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
272 / Index
saved number 86
signal, Long Tones 223
signal, Pause 223
signal, Programmed Release 224
signal, run/stop 224
signal, switching from pulse to tone
225
signal, Wait for Dial Tone 225
standard dial 73
switching between pulse and tone
233
switching from pulse to tone 225
using Pause 223
dialing filters, Hospitality room states 178
dialing mode, set lock 219
dialing plan
enblock dialing 196
PRI 196
dialpad
change name 33
entering letters and numbers 29
entering numbers and letters 33
programming buttons 17
DID
2-way DID, PRI 194
calls, extra-dial telephone
ringing service 210
CAP lines 47
CbC private calls 195
CbC public calls 195
PRI description 192
DID template
M7208 145
M7310 lower buttons 143
M7324 buttons 145
T7208 145
T7316 buttons 142
digital connections, to ISDN networks and
devices 202
direct dial, forward, external 215
direct inward system access (DISA), see
also DISA 227
direct-dial telephone
programming 216
using 215
DISA, COS password 227
disable autobumping 128
disconnect
from conference 59
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
releasing a call, accidentally 67
disconnect supervision, assigning 233
display
2-line 17
automatic caller ID display 51
button equivalents for one-line display
237
buttons 17, 19
Call information 50
call information 49
changing contrast 135
changing first display 51
changing the language 155
contrast 155
Display digits 26
End of Session 26
name instead of number 189
network name, BRI 198
one-line 237
PRI Network Name Display 193
restoring message indication 149
system speed dial 32
time and date 67
display buttons
one-line display 237
user preferences 153
Display digits 26, 33
distinctive ring patterns(DRP)
answering a call 45
distinctive rings 148
distribution modes, Hunt Groups 163
DN (see internal numbers)
DND 95
DND from 46
DND on busy 106
DND transfer 46
DND, cancel 190
DNs
checking for updates 26
rooms 175
Do Not Disturb
canceling 190
on Busy 39
see also DND 190
set lock 219
using 190
Do not disturb 69, 76, 93
Do Not Disturb on Busy, see also DND on
busy 106
P0992640 02
Index / 273
DOD
CbC private calls 195
CbC public calls 195
PRI description 192
DRT 46
dual memory buttons, defaults 142
duration of call 66
E
echo, handsfree 63
emergency 911 13, 194
enable autobumping 128
enbloc dialing, PRI dialing plan 196
End of session 26
ending a call 48
ending test session 240
enhanced, answer button 56
Enter code 137
Enter digits 81, 85
Enter zone 116
entering letters through the dialpad 29
equipment, external page equipment 117
erasing
Call Log items 129
messages from list 121
programmed features 136
Evening Sched 210
Exchanged 148
Exclusive Hold 75, 89
Expensive route 69
expensive route warning tone 236
extended, answer button 56
external
access to Norstar 226
access, describing line pools 235
access, using remote packages on
line pools 227
accessing voice mail 133
autodial, programming 79
Call Forward (see Line Redirection)
page 114
paging equipment 117
external calls
assigning Long Tones 223
line pool 218
transferring 92
using Link 221
using Programmed Release 224
P0992640 02
external line
routing table 218
external line buttons 147
external lines
call fowarding 103
name display 189
external number, last number redial
description 82
external page option, default page button
146
extra-dial telephone
DID calls 210
direct dial 215
extra-dial telephone, DID 210
F
fast busy tone, remote access 229
FEATR 153
feature
Message Reply Enhancement, analog
telephones 120
privacy 65
using line redirection 112
using page types 114
voice call 123
feature button 17, 18, 219
feature code, control telephone 207
Feature moved 137
feature programming
add change speed dial number 32
allow line redirect 109
automatic call forward 104
auxiliary ringer 220
blocking redial numbers 86
broadcasting to Hunt Groups 163
call display, first display 51
call forward no answer 36
call forward on busy 38
call restrictions, Hospitality 176
change number of rings 37
changing line name 35
changing telephone name 34, 189
direct dial telephone 216
do not disturb on busy 39
external autodial 79
group pickup 53
Handsfree 63
handsfree answer back 64
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
274 / Index
Hospitality alarm 180
Hospitality passwords 173
hotline on telephone 217
hunt delay 164
Hunt Group busy line setting 165
Hunt Group queue timeout 166
last number redial 82
line redirect ring control 110
line redirection 108
Long Tones 223
overflow set 167
page zone 115
paging 115
Pause 223
programmed release 224
room/desk information 175
Run/Stop dialing signal 224
select speed dial line 32
service times 177
set lock 220
system speed dial 31
system speed dial name 33
time and date 29
Trunk Answer 55
user speed dial 84
using dialpad to enter letters 29
using Link 221
Wait for Dial Tone signal 225
Feature timeout 243
features
adjusting ring volume 149
Autobumping 128
autodial 79
auxiliary ringer 220
Button Inquiry 134
Call Display 49
Call Duration Timer 66
Call Forward 103
call forward, using 103
Call Information 49
Call Log 126
Call Park 96
Call Pickup 52
Call Queuing 90
Call Transfer 91
Callback 102
Camp-on 94
changing ring type 148
Class of Service password 230
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
Conference Calls 57
contrast adjustment 135
dialing modes 72
dialing signal
Programmed Release 224
run/stop 224
Wait for Dial Tone 225
Do Not Disturb 190
Do Not Disturb on Busy 106
Exclusive Hold 89
external call transfer 92
Group Listening 60
Handsfree 61, 62
hiding the message or calls display
149
Hold, many calls 88
independent Hold during conference
58
Last Number Redial 82
limiting feature access 219
line pools 71
Line Redirection 107–113
Link 221
Messages, sending 117
moving line buttons 147
paging 114–117
Pause 223
PRI name and number blocking 194
priority call 74
Privacy 65
programming on buttons 136
remote access to the system 226
Restriction service 204
Ring Again 76
ring type 148
Ringing service 204
Routing service 205
Saved Number Redial 86
sending messages using analog
telephones 117
sending messages using display 117
Speed Dial 83
Test a Telephone 239–242
testing set features 239
Time and Date 212
User Preferences 151
file transfer using ISDN 202
filters, Hospitality room states 178
FIND 153
P0992640 02
Index / 275
first display, changing 51
Foreign Exchange, see also FX
Forward denied 107
Forward no answer, changing 104
Forward> 107
forwarding calls 36
Call Forward 103
Call Forward delay 105
Call Forward No Answer 104
Call Forward on Busy 105
direct dial 215
Do Not Disturb on Busy 106
Line Redirection 107–113
to voice mail 107
Foward delay 37
full, call restrictions 177
FX
CbC type 195
see also Foreign Exchange 195
G
green button caps 139
grey button caps 139
Group 4 fax, using ISDN applications 203
group answering
SWCA keys 98
Group Listening 60
Group Pickup
Hunt Groups 53
using 53
H
handling many calls at once
Call Queuing 90
Hold 88
handset speaker, testing 241
Handsfree
assign button 64
automatic answer 64
changing to handsfree 62
exiting to handset 62
headset 64
indicators 62
making calls 61
muting the set 62
preventing echo 63
programming 63
talking in turn 63
P0992640 02
using 62
Handsfree 64
Handsfree Answerback
programming 64
Voice Call 124
handsfree button 18, 146
headset
Handsfree requirement 64
testing 241
hearing aid compatibility 49
Hidden number 69, 83, 87
Hold
automatic 88
button 17, 18
Conference Call 58
display call information 51
exclusive 89
exclusive hold 75
listening while on hold 89
putting conference on 58
re-establish conference call 58
retrieving call 88
using background music 191
using SWCA keys 98
Hold or release 132, 245
Hospitality
admin set, controlling alarms 181
alarm features 180
cancel alarm 183
cond password 174
delaying alarm 183
desk password 173
passwords 173
room/desk information 175
service done 178
service times 177
set description 173
sets per room 175
setting room condition 178
setting room dialing filters 178
turn off alarm 183
using administration set 179
using room set 179
using room/set programming 178
using the alarm 182
hospitality
password 214
Host system dialing signals
Long Tones 223
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
276 / Index
Pause 223
programmed release 224
Run/Stop 224
system speed dial 83
using an ATA 223
Wait for Dial Tone 225
Hotline
bypassing the telephone 217
setting up the telephone 217
using with Handsfree button 217
hour, set 30
Hunt Groups
adding members 159
answer incoming calls 43
assigning lines 161
broadcast conversion note 157
Broadcast mode 163
busy line setting 165
busy routing 165
call forward no answer 38
call forward on busy 39, 105
call foward no answer 104
call park 97
calls on Hold 88
cannot use Voice Call feature 123
creating 233
distribution modes 163
DND on busy 106
group pickup 53
hotline, set DN 217
hunt delay 164
incoming calls 163
member DN 159
moving members 160
no videophones 158
overflow set 167
paging 115
priority call 74
programming 157
queue time-out 166
removing members 159
rerouting to a Hunt Group 56
Rotary mode 163
Sequential mode 163
setting the name 168
simultaneous ring 163
temporarily leaving group 191
unassigning lines 161
use Do Not Disturb 191
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
using call forward 103
using ring again 76
where to use 157
hunt groups
system monitoring 219
hybrid template
M7208 145
M7310 lower buttons 143
M7324 buttons 144
T7208 145
T7316 buttons 142
I
In use 122, 246
In use SETNAME 132
Inactive feature 243
incoming calls
2-way DID 194
hunt groups 43
indicators 43
overflow routing 236
simultaneous ring 163
SWCA keys 100
tracking 126
using COS on auto answer 230
Incoming Line Groups (ILG), see Hunt
Groups
Incoming only 246
indicators
active service display 210
call indicators on CAP 48
handsfree and mute 62
incoming call 43
line active 235
long distance call 243
memory buttons 237
message waiting, analog telephone
118
restoring message indicators 149
rings 44
installer programming 14
installing telephones 185–188
Integrated Services Digital Network (see
ISDN)
Intercom 110
Intercom # 81
intercom button
answer button calls 56
P0992640 02
Index / 277
autodial line 80
using as the line for Autodial 80
internal numbers, description of length 234
internal page 114
Internet access, using ISDN applications
203
Invalid code 85, 225, 243
Invalid location 148
Invalid number 81, 93, 97, 246
Invalid state 201
Invalid zone 116
Inwat, CbC type 195
ISDN
2-way DID 194
applications 202–203
BRI features 198
BRI services 196
Call by Call 195
call forward all calls 197
connecting to 202
description 192
desktop conferencing, using 202
device support on BRI 197
dialing plan, PRI 196
emergency 911 194
equipment 202–203
file transfer, using 202
Group 4 fax, using 203
Internet access using 203
LAN access, using remote 203
LAN to LAN bridging, using 203
leased line backup, using 203
making calls from ISDN terminals 72
Network Name DIsplay, BRI 198
ONN blocking, BRI 199
PRI name and number blocking 194
PRI Network Name Display 193
service provider features 199, 200
telecommuting, using 203
terminal line access 197
videoconferencing, using 202
ISDN terminal
Automatic Call Back 200
Automatic Recall 200
Call Forward 199
calling the call forward number 200
cancel Call Forward 200
no ONN 194
P0992640 02
L
LAN
remote access using ISDN
applications 203
router 203
to LAN bridging, ISDN applications
203
language
changing on the display 155
set lock 219
last number redial 82
leased line backup using ISDN applications
203
length of call, timing 66
length of internal numbers 234
letters, entering with dialpad 33
licensing, background music 191
limiting
access to Norstar 227
telephone feature use 219
telephone programming 219
using alternate or scheduled services
204
line
access from ISDN terminal 197
assign to Hunt Groups 161
assignment 234
button indicators 235
button moving 147
changing the name 35
changing the name of a line 189
choosing a line 70
choosing autodial 80
describing prime line 238
description of menu 22
for external call forwarding 103
Hunt Group busy line setting 165
indicators, description 44
line redirection, describing 107
picking up calls 234
pool 71–72
Redirection, canceling 109
Redirection, using 107–113
remote access to the system 226
replying to messages 119
retrieving a parked call 96
speed dial 32
target line 235
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
278 / Index
unassigning Hunt Groups 161
using line button to answer call 44
Line 001 waiting 244
line appearances
using SWCA keys 98
line button
assignment 234
bypassing the Hotline button 217
CAP 47
joining call 65
moving 147
privacy 65
Line denied 55, 69, 246
Line hung up 95
Line in use 245
line pool
description 71, 235
external lines routing 218
memory button 235
overflow routing 236
programming buttons 136
programming memory button 72
using remote packages to restrict
external access 227
line pool access code
autodial 80
external calls 218
line profile, viewing 232
Line Redirection 110
line redirection
all lines 108
allow programming 109
call forward no answer 105
call fowarding differences 112
programming 108
redirect ring control 110
using 112
Line001 callback 46
Line001 hung up 93
Line001 to prime 46
Line001 transfer 244
LineXXX to prime 46
Link
blocking 222
host system dialing signals 221
program on memory button 222
LIST 153
listening 60
listening on hold 89
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
log space, programming 131
log, view call log 128
logging a call manually 127
Logit (see Call Log)
long distance call
indicator 243
using COS password 226
Long Tones 224
loop start line, remote access 226
Lunch Sched 210
M
M7100 telephone
Autodial 80
button defaults 146
Button Inquiry 134
Call Conference 57
Call Queuing 244
Conference Call on hold 58
Conference Call, independent Hold
58
Hold many calls 88
Incoming Line Group button 44, 70
internal numbers 234
line assignment 234
memory buttons 237
one-line display 237
Ring Again 245
special set features 236
Speed Dial programming 84
standard dial 73
Voice Call 124
M7208 telephone
button defaults 145
memory buttons 237
one-line display 237
M7310 telephone 16
button defaults 142
memory buttons 237
viewing line profile 232
viewing set profile 232
M7324 telephone 16
button defaults 144
CAP 47
memory buttons 237
viewing line profile 232
viewing set profile 232
maintaining security 228
P0992640 02
Index / 279
Make calls first 246
making calls
dialing modes 72
Handsfree 61
priority call 74
using a line button 70
using line pools 71
using Ring Again 76
with automatic Handsfree 64
managing COS passwords 230
manual, restriction service 205
member DN, Hunt Groups 159
members
adding to Hunt Groups 159
moving Hunt Group members 160
remove from Hunt Group 159
memory buttons 17
CAP 47
default assignment 139
erasing features 136
indicators 237
Link 222
M7310 142
power off 79
programming feature codes 136
programming with line pool 72
storing autodial numbers 79
menus, top level 22
Message denied 122
Message list 122
Message Reply Enhancement 120
Message to 123
message waiting indicator, analog
telephone 118
messages
alarm messages, recording 239
analog telephone, answer 118
canceling a sent message 119
forwarded to Call Pickup 118
hiding display 149
removing from list 121
replying 119
restoring call indication 149
sending 117
sending, using the display 117
viewing 119, 122
Messages & Calls 123, 132
microphone
muting 62
P0992640 02
using correctly 63
Microphone muted 125
MICS, maximum target lines 235
MICS-XC, maximum target lines 235
mid, call restrictions 177
minutes, set 30
monitoring
answer buttons 55
calls 235
calls with CAP 48
line pool status 76
lines, see also Disconnect Supervision
233
telephone status 76
transferred calls 102
month, set 30
Move line from 148
Move line to 148
moving
911 service note 189
automatic telephone relocation 189
Hunt Group members 160
line buttons, set lock 219
telephones 189
music
background, licensing 191
turning off 191
mute
assign button 64
button icon 18
button positioning on sets 146
indicators 62
muting the set in Handsfree 62
voice call tones 124
N
name
changing telephone name 189
display, BRI lines 198
Hunt Groups 168
PRI Network Name Display 193
system speed dial 33
name and number blocking
BRI 199
PRI 194
see also ONN 194
needs service, Hospitality 178
Network Call Diversion 201
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
280 / Index
Network Name Display
available features 193
BRI 198
PRI 193
New calls begin 132
night control phone (see control telephone)
Night Sched 210
night schedule, restriction service 206
Night Service (see services and ringing
service)
9_ 68, 246
no answer, refusing second call 190
No button free 123, 246
No call on 97
No call to park 97
No calls waiting 244
No free lines 246
No info to log 132
No last number 69, 83
No line selected 69, 244, 246
No line to use 111
No log assigned 132
No number saved 87
No number stored 85, 123
No response 201
No resume item 132
No services ON 209
No voice call 125
Norstar system dial tone 229
Norstar telephones
installing 187
mounting on a wall 188
set profile, viewing 232
viewing line profile 232
Not allowed 201
Not available 201, 243
Not in service 69, 93, 95, 107, 244
Not incoming 201
Not subscribed 201
numbers, entering with dialpad 33
O
OK 238
On another call 70, 76
On hold 89
one button dialing (see Autodial)
one-line display
7100 and 7208 sets 237
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
display button equivalents 237
ONN blocking, BRI 199
outgoing calls
SWCA keys 101
outgoing calls, 2-way DID 194
Outgoing line 111
Outwats, CbC type 195
overflow
call routing 236
expensive route warning 236
Hunt Group routing 165
set Hunt Groups 167
overlay 15, 19, 21, 289
OVERRIDE 238
overriding
Call Forward 104
services, manually 210
P
page
default button 146
external equipment 117
making an announcement 114
programming 115
shortcut codes 114
types 114
zones, programming 115
Page choice 116
Page timeout 116
Paging ALL 116
Paging busy 116
Park denied 97
Parked call 244
Parked Call, retrieving 96
Parked on 97
Parking full 98
password
Basic 151, 211
Call Log 130–131
changing 130
Call Log, canceling 131
change COS 230
changing 211, 212
Class of Service 230
clearing Call Log 213
cond pswd 214
description of menu 22
desk 173
P0992640 02
Index / 281
desk pswd 214
entering 26
Hospitality 174
hospitality 173
Hospitality password 214
managing COS passwords 230
registration (Companion) 212
room condition 174
security practices 228
System Coordinator 14, 211
system speed dial code 31
user preferences 151
pause
Host system dialing signals 223
in a sequence of numbers, see Wait
for Dial Tone
PBX
link feature 221
programming Run/Stop dialing
sequence 224
Tie CbC service 195
PBX template
M7208 145
M7310 lower buttons 143
M7324 buttons 144
T7208 145
T7316 buttons 141
personal programming 14
phone 101
Pick up receiver 245
Pickup 54
Pickup denied 54, 55
pickup group, changing 54
Please wait 75
Pool code 111
power failure, clock 31
power off, affect on memory buttons 79
power supply, testing 242
pre-dial 73
pre-printed button caps 139
Press a button 81, 134, 137
Press a line 148
Press held line 60
prevent calls, restriction services 204
PRI
2-way DID 194
Call by Call 195
Dialing Plan 196
DID 192
P0992640 02
DOD 192
emergency 911 194
ISDN description 192
name and number blocking 194
Network Name Display 193
prime line
description 238
external call routing 218
standard dial 73
system speed dial 32
prime telephone
answering calls 46
CAP 47
direct dial 215
overflow routing 236
using DND 190
priority call
exclusive hold 75
see also Call Queuing 43, 74
Priority denied 75
Priority>223 245
privacy
changing status 65
conference call 57
creating conference call 66
set lock 219
private
branch exchange, accessing from
Norstar (see also host system
dialing signals) 221
call 66
CbC type 195
private dialing plan, Call by Call 195
private line, description 238
Private name 52, 193, 198
private network, enblock dialing 196
Private number 52
Program and HOLD 81, 85, 137
Program and OK 81, 85, 137
Programmed 81
Programmed Release, host system dialing
signals 224
programming
administration programming 14
administration set 15
alarm feature, Hospitality 180
alarms 181
auxiliary ringer 220
Basic password 14
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
282 / Index
basics 14
broadcast mode 163
busy line setting 165
Call Display 51
Call Forward 36, 39
Call Forward delay 105
call forward on busy 38
Call Pickup 52
call restrictions, Hospitality 176
CAP 47
changes, planning 15
changing buttons, users 152
changing the name of a line 35
changing the name of a telephone
34, 189
check DNs 26
condition password 174
customizing your Norstar 14
direct-dial telephones 216
entering passwords 26
external autodial button 79
features on buttons 136
Forward no answer 104
group pickup 53
Handsfree 63
Handsfree Answerback 64
hospitality cond password 214
hospitality desk password 214
hospitality password 214
Hospitality passwords 173
Hotline telephone 217
hunt delay 164
installer programming 14
line redirection 108
Link 221
log space 131
Long Tones 223
overflow set, Hunt Groups 167
overlay 15
page zone 115
paging 115
Pause 223
personal programming 14
programmed release 224
programming indicatorª 19
programming indicatorº 19
programming map 22–26
programming overlay 19
queue timeout 166
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
recording changes 14
Restriction service 204, 205
Ringing service 204
room/desk information 175
Routing service 205
Run/Stop dialing signal 224
service times, Hospitality 177
Set lock 219
set lock 220
starting and ending a session 26–27
system and user speed dial 83
System Coordinator 26
system speed dial 31
telephones
Call Forward, do not disturb 39
Do Not Disturb 190
Do Not Disturb on Busy 39
priority call 74
time and date 29
top-level menu description 22
user preferences 151
User Speed Dial 84
Wait for Dial Tone signal 225
programming record 14
programming telephones
block Link 222
blocking Redial 86
Last Number Redial 82
public network
dialing plan, PRI 196
enblock dialing 196
remote access to Norstar 228
Public, CbC type 195
pulse dialing
selecting on the set 225
switching 233
Q
query alarm 181
queue
Hunt Group routing 165
Hunt Group timeout 166
QUIT 238
R
recording alarm codes 239
recording changes 14
redial
P0992640 02
Index / 283
last number 82
saved number 86
Redir by 111
redirect ring, programming 110
Redirect denied 111
redirection
all lines 108
cancelling 109
lines 107
loops, avoiding 112
programming 108
ring control 110
using 112
refusing to answer second call 190
Registration password 212
Release a call 95, 245
Release button
® 48
icons 18
Release calls 245
releasing
accidentally 67
from conference 59
relocation, automatic relocation,
telephones 189
remote access 226–228
change COS password 230
fast busy tone 229
loop start line 226
managing COS passwords 230
security 227
stuttered dial tone 229
system dial tone 229
through public network 228
tones 229
usiing ISDN with LAN 203
using COS password 227
remove
from a conference call 59
Hunt Group members 159
message, analog telephone 121
messages 121
replying to a message
analog telephone 120
digital phone 119
reporting alarm codes 239
Restr’n 209
Restricted call 70, 94, 246
restricting
P0992640 02
access to Norstar 227
access using COS password 227
feature use, see Set Lock
telephone feature use 219
telephone programming 219
using alternate or scheduled services
204
restriction service
control telephone 207
filters, COS for remote access calls
230
naming 206
Night schedule 206
preventing calls 204
turning off/on 205
retrieval codes, Call Park 96
retrieving
held call 88
parked call 96
ring
auxiliary ringer 220
changing ring type 148, 155
changing the number of rings before
call is forwarded 37
description of types 44, 148
ring volume setting 149
Ringing service 206
rotary mode 163
sequential 163
simultaneous rings 163
Ring Again 76
7100 series terminals 245
set lock 219
Ring Again? 70, 77
ring delay, call fowarding 107
Ringing 209
ringing
distinctive ring patterns 45
ringing service
restriction services 204
Trunk Answer 55
rings
change number for call forward 37
setting Hunt Group delay 164
room
setting condition 178
using room programming 178
room information, programming 175
room set
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
284 / Index
description 173
using 179
rooms set
call restrictions 176
rotary mode, Hunt Groups 163
Routing 209
routing
2-way DID 194
external lines 218
Hunt Group routing options 165
overflow 236
routing service
control telephone 207
outgoing calls 205
overflow routing 236
run/stop, host system dialing signals 224
S
saved number redial
set lock 219
using 86
Sched 4 210
Sched 5 210
Sched 6 210
scheduled services 204
schedules, viewing active 208
second call, refusing 190
security
managing COS passwords 230
practices 228
system 227
using COS password 227
using DISA 227
Select a line 70, 85
Select line out 111
Select line(s) 111
Send message? 70
sending messages
set lock 219
using feature 117
sent message, cancelling 119
sequential mode, Hunt Groups 163
Service
control telephone 207
overflow routing 236
routing service 205
turn off 208
turn on manually 206
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
service done, Hospitality 178
Service Modes, see Services
service provider features
911 service 189
Automatic Call Back 200
Automatic Recall 200
Call Forward 199
call information 126
calling the forwarded numbe 200
canceling Call Forward 200
Service Schedules
Evening Sched 210
Lunch Sched 210
Night Sched 210
Sched 4 210
Sched 5 210
Sched 6 210
service times, Hospitality 177
Services
description of menu 22
display indicator for active services
210
overriding 210
Restriction service 204
Ringing service 204
set lock 219
Trunk Answer 55
turning off and on using feature codes
207
turning off/on 205
using control telephone to set 204
viewing active schedules 208
Services ON 210
set
date 30
types of Hospitality sets 173
using administration set 179
using room set 179
using set programming 178
Set Lock
Full 219
limiting access to features 219
partial 219
programming 220
using 219–220
Set locked 243
set profile, viewing 232
SHOW 238
Show set 34
P0992640 02
Index / 285
signal
Link 221
Long Tones 223
Pause 223
Programmed Release 224
run/stop 224
Wait for Dial Tone 225
simultaneous ring, Hunt Groups 163
snooze, delaying alarm 183
speakers
telephone, testing 242
voice call 123
special telephones 215
speed dial
7100 sets 84
add/change number 32
changing user buttons 153
choosing a system code 31
code 84
display 32
entering name 33
making a call 84
programming for User 84
selecting a line 32
system programming 31
using 83
splitting a Conference Call 59
square template
M7208 145
M7310 lower buttons 143
M7324 buttons 144
T7208 145
T7316 buttons 141
standard dial
prime line 73
selecting a line 73
Start of list 123
Still in trnsfer 94
stop calls from ringing at set 190
stuttered dial tone 227, 229
suspending a call
see also Call Park and Hold
using Call Park 96
SWCA
no free call keys 101
using 98
system access, changing programming
passwords 211
system code, system speed dial 31
P0992640 02
System Coordinator
maintaining 911 records 194
password 14
programming 26
Restriction and routing service 207
system dial tone 229
system monitor telephone
using 219
System prgrming, description of menu 22
system speed dial
add or change number 32
description 83
description of menu Sys speed dial 22
display numbers 32
host system signaling codes 83
name 33
select a line 32
system time and date, change 212
T
T7100 Business Series Terminal
autodial 80
button defaults 146
Button Inquiry 134
Call Conference 57
Call Queuing 244
Conference Call on hold 58
Conference Call, independent Hold
58
Hold many calls 88
Incoming Line Group button 70
internal numbers 234
line assignment 234
memory buttons 237
one-line display 237
Ring Again 245
special set features 236
Speed Dial programming 84
standard dial 73
Voice Call 124
T7208 Business Series Terminal
button defaults 145
memory buttons 237
one-line display 237
T7316 Business Series Terminal
administration set 16
button defaults 140
memory buttons 237
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
286 / Index
overlay 20
viewing line profile 232
viewing set profile 232
talking in turn, Handsfree feature 63
target line
changing the name 189
description 235
maximum 235
overflow 236
TEL# 153
telecommuting using ISDN applications
203
telephone
7100 special set features 236
911 189, 194
accessing external voice mail 133
adjusting the display contrast 135
administration display 17
administration sets, illustration 16
alarm 239
announcement 123
answer message on analog telephone
118
answer prime telephone 46
answering voice call 124
assigning lines 234
automatic relocation 189
auxiliary ringer 220
blocking link 222
blocking redial feature 86
button inquiry 134
buttons 17
bypassing the Hotline set 217
Call Display information 51
call forward 36
call iinformation 49
call indicators 44
call log, viewing 128
cancel a sent message 119
cancel DND 190
cancel voice call 124
CAP 47, 215
changing direct dial telephone 216
changing line name 189
changing set name 189
changing the name 34
control service schedules 218
control set 207
default button assingment 139
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
denying voice call 124
dialpad buttons 17
direct-dial 215
directed pickup 52
disconnect supervision 233
display buttons 19
display call information 50
DND 190
ending test session 240
erasing call log items 129
extra-dial 207, 210, 215
Feature button 17, 18
group pickup 53
handsfree button 18
hiding display 149
Hold button 17, 18
Hold call information 51
Hospitality administration set 179
Hospitality room set 179
Hospitality service sets 173
Hotline 217
Hunt Group overflow set 167
installing BST sets 185
installing Norstar sets 187
last number redial 82
line profile, viewing 232
log calls automatically 126
logging call manually 127
Long Tones 223
making calls from ISDN terminal 72
memory buttons 17
moving custom programming 189
mute 18, 62, 124
name display 189
Norstar telephone overlay 21
prime 215
programming paging 115
pulse dialing 225
refusing second call 190
Release button 17, 18
remove messages 121
replying to a message 119
retrieving a parked call 96
ring indicators 44
sending messages 117
sent messages, viewing 122
setting up a hotline 217
stop ringing using DND 190
system monitor, hunt groups 219
P0992640 02
Index / 287
system speed dial 31
testing 239–242
turn off music 191
using background music 191
viewing messages 119
viewing set profile 232
volume control 18
telephone speakers, testing 242
telephones
set lock 219
template, button assignments 140
terminal connections, BST sets 185
Terminals&Sets, description 22
testing
buttons 240, 241
ending session 240
telephone 239
Their list full 123
3 parties only 59
Tie, CbC type 195
time
change 212
service times, Hospitality 177
time and date
≤ ••ÊȘ‰ 212
≤••ÊȘ‰ 29
≤806 123
changing 29
displaying 67
hiding message indication 149
length of a call 66
time savers
autodial 79
Saved Number Redial 86
Speed Dial 83
Time&Date, description of menu 22
timeout, Hunt Group queues 166
tones
camped call tones 94
controlling length 223
dialing, switching 233
expensive route 236
fast busy, remote access 229
remote access tones 229
stuttered dial tone, remote access 229
system dial tone 229
voice call 124
top-level menus 22
tracking incoming calls, Call Log 126
P0992640 02
transfer
calls, monitoring 102
cancelling 93
see Call Transfer
Transfer denied 94
transferring calls 91
Callback 102
parking a call 96
using Camp-on 94
troubleshooting
reporting and recording alarms 239
testing handset speaker 241
testing telephone buttons 241
testing telephone display 240
testing telephone speaker 242
testing the headset 241
testing the power supply 242
using the alarm telephone 239
Trunk Answer
feature 55
picking up calls 234
set lock 219
turning off background music 191
U
unassigning lines, Hunt Groups 161
Unequipped line 111
Unknown name 52, 193, 198
Unknown name 131
Unknown number 52
Unknown number 85
until * 209
Use line pool? 245
Use prime line 32
User Preferences 151–156
≤•• Ë͉ 212
user preferences
Basic password 151
change display contrast 155
change how calls are dialed 154
change languages on display 155
change ring type 155
changing button programming 152
changing speed dial 153
display buttons 153
password 151
subheadings 152
user call log options 154
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
288 / Index
user programming 14
user speed dial
changing 153
description 83
programming 84
set lock 219
using
alarms 182
background music 191
Call Forward 103
Call Log 126
DND 190
Do Not Disturb 190
Hospitality administration set 179
Hunt Groups 157
Last Number Redial 82
line redirection 112
Link 221
name and number blocking 194
Norstar remotely 226–228
the room set 179
this guide 13
W
Wait for Dial Tone, Host system dialing
signals 225
wake-up
cancel alarm 183
setting alarm 180
turn off alarm 183
using sets 182
wall mounting
BST sets 186
Norstar sets 188
Y
year, set 30
Your list full 123
V
vacant, call restrictions 177
videoconferencing, using ISDN
applications 202
VIEW 238
viewing
active Services 208
Call Log 128
messages 119, 122
Voice Call 123–125
answering 124
cancel 124
deny 124
Voice call 125
Voice Call Deny, set lock 219
voice mail
accessing your Norstar system 133
using Call Forward 107
voice message center, viewing messages
119
volume
bar, description 238
button 18
set control 238
Modular ICS 6.0 System Coordinator Guide
P0992640 02
Backup programming overlays
Business
Series
Terminals
Programming
Overlay
Heading
Back
Show
Next
P0914001 01
Heading
Show
Back
Next
PO698666 Issue 02
Printed in Canada
Norstar Programming Overlay
After you have finished programming, store
your Norstar Programming Overlay in the slots
provided on the back cover.
Après avoir terminé la programmation, rangez
la grille Norstar dans les fentes prévues à cet
effet à la fin de ce guide.
Cuando haya terminado de programar, inserte
en estas ranuras su Plantilla de programación
Norstar que se encuentra en la contra tapa.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement